Dell Storage Manager 2016 R3

Storage Center
Administrator’s Guide
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer.

CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the
problem.
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.

Copyright © 2016 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its
subsidiaries. Other trademarks may be trademarks of their respective owners.

2017 - 01

Rev. A
Contents
About This Guide...............................................................................................................11
How to Find Information.................................................................................................................................................... 11
Contacting Dell.................................................................................................................................................................. 11
Revision History................................................................................................................................................................. 11
Audience............................................................................................................................................................................11
Related Publications...........................................................................................................................................................11
Storage Manager Documents...................................................................................................................................... 11
Storage Center Documents........................................................................................................................................ 12
FluidFS Cluster Documents.........................................................................................................................................12
Fluid Cache Cluster Documents.................................................................................................................................. 13
Dell TechCenter.......................................................................................................................................................... 13

1 Getting Started.............................................................................................................. 15
Connect to a Storage Center with the Dell Storage Manager Client.................................................................................15
Dell Storage Manager Client Requirements.......................................................................................................................16
Next Steps........................................................................................................................................................................ 17
Change the Admin Password...................................................................................................................................... 17
Create Volumes...........................................................................................................................................................17
Create Servers............................................................................................................................................................ 17
Map Volumes to Servers............................................................................................................................................. 17
Monitor Alerts............................................................................................................................................................. 17
Monitor Storage Usage............................................................................................................................................... 17

2 Storage Center Overview.............................................................................................. 19

Storage Center Hardware Components............................................................................................................................19
Controllers.................................................................................................................................................................. 19
Switches..................................................................................................................................................................... 19
Enclosures.................................................................................................................................................................. 19
How Storage Virtualization Works.................................................................................................................................... 19
Disk Management...................................................................................................................................................... 20
Volumes...................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Storage Types ............................................................................................................................................................21
Data Progression........................................................................................................................................................23
Low Space Modes......................................................................................................................................................23
Storage Profiles..........................................................................................................................................................24
Storage Profiles for Standard Storage Types............................................................................................................. 24
Storage Profiles for Flash Optimized Storage............................................................................................................ 25
Storage Virtualization for SCv2000 Series Controllers............................................................................................... 26
User Interface for Storage Center Management.............................................................................................................. 27
Summary Tab............................................................................................................................................................. 28
Storage Tab............................................................................................................................................................... 28
Hardware Tab............................................................................................................................................................ 30

3
 Charting Tab.............................................................................................................................................................. 30
Alerts Tab................................................................................................................................................................... 31
Logs Tab..................................................................................................................................................................... 31

3 Storage Center Deployment..........................................................................................33

Supported Operating Systems for Storage Center Automated Setup .............................................................................33
Discovering and Configuring Uninitialized Storage Centers from the Dell Storage Manager Client Welcome Screen.......33
Discover and Configure Uninitialized SCv2000 Series Storage Centers from the Dell Storage Manager Client
Welcome Screen........................................................................................................................................................ 33
Discover and Configure Uninitialized SCv2000 Series Storage Centers from the Welcome Screen (Fibre
Channel/SAS)............................................................................................................................................................38
Configuring SC4020, SC8000, and SC9000 Series Storage Centers...............................................................................42
Submit the Storage Center License........................................................................................................................... 43
Create a Disk Folder (Configure Storage Center Wizard).......................................................................................... 43
Add a Controller (Configure Storage Center Wizard).................................................................................................43
Set System Information (Configure Storage Center Wizard)..................................................................................... 44
Enter Key Management Server Settings (Configure Storage Center Wizard)........................................................... 44
Configure Ports (Configure Storage Center Wizard)................................................................................................. 44
Inherit Settings (Configure Storage Center Wizard).................................................................................................. 46
Configure Time Settings.............................................................................................................................................46
Configure SMTP Server Settings...............................................................................................................................46
Review the SupportAssist System State Information Collection and Storage Agreement.......................................... 47
Provide Contact Information...................................................................................................................................... 47
Set Up a localhost or VMware Host................................................................................................................................. 47
Set Up a localhost from Initial Setup...........................................................................................................................47
Set Up a VMware Host from Initial Setup.................................................................................................................. 48
Set Up a VMware vCenter Host from Initial Setup.....................................................................................................48

4 Storage Center Administration...................................................................................... 51

Storage Center User Privileges and User Groups..............................................................................................................51
Managing Volumes............................................................................................................................................................51
Attributes That Determine Volume Behavior...............................................................................................................51
Volume Icons.............................................................................................................................................................. 51
Creating Volumes.......................................................................................................................................................52
Modifying Volumes.....................................................................................................................................................55
Copying Volumes....................................................................................................................................................... 59
Creating and Managing Volume Folders......................................................................................................................61
Creating and Managing Volume Snapshots................................................................................................................ 62
Mapping Volumes to Servers..................................................................................................................................... 64
Deleting Volumes and Volume Folders........................................................................................................................67
Managing Data Reduction................................................................................................................................................ 68
Data Eligible for Data Reduction.................................................................................................................................68
Supported Hardware Platforms................................................................................................................................. 69
Compression.............................................................................................................................................................. 69
Deduplication..............................................................................................................................................................70
View Amount of Space Saved by Data Reduction...................................................................................................... 70

4
 Change the Default Data Reduction Profile.................................................................................................................71
Pause or Resume Data Reduction............................................................................................................................... 71
Disable Data Reduction for a Volume.......................................................................................................................... 71
Managing Snapshot Profiles............................................................................................................................................. 72
Default Snapshot Profiles........................................................................................................................................... 72
Non-Consistent and Consistent Snapshot Profiles.....................................................................................................72
Creating and Applying Snapshot Profiles.................................................................................................................... 73
Modifying Snapshot Profiles.......................................................................................................................................74
Managing Expiration Rules for Remote Snapshots..................................................................................................... 75
Managing Storage Profiles............................................................................................................................................... 76
Create a Storage Profile.............................................................................................................................................76
Apply a Storage Profile to One or More Volumes....................................................................................................... 76
Apply a Storage Profile to a Server............................................................................................................................ 76
Delete a Storage Profile..............................................................................................................................................77
Managing QoS Profiles..................................................................................................................................................... 77
Create a QoS Profile...................................................................................................................................................77
Edit a QoS Profile....................................................................................................................................................... 77
Delete a QoS Volume Profile...................................................................................................................................... 78
Apply a QoS Profile to a Volume.................................................................................................................................78
Remove a Group QoS Profile From a Volume.............................................................................................................78
Importing Volumes from an EqualLogic PS Series Storage Array......................................................................................78
Offline Import............................................................................................................................................................. 78
Online Import..............................................................................................................................................................79
Connect to an External Device (iSCSI).......................................................................................................................79
PS Series Storage Array Import Requirements...........................................................................................................79
Storage Center Import Requirements.........................................................................................................................79
Performing an Offline Import from an External Device............................................................................................... 79

5 Storage Center Server Administration...........................................................................81

Server Management Options............................................................................................................................................ 81
Managing Storage Center Server Objects.................................................................................................................. 81
Creating Servers............................................................................................................................................................... 81
Create a Physical Server.............................................................................................................................................81
Create a Virtual Server...............................................................................................................................................82
Create a Server Cluster..............................................................................................................................................83
Create a Server from the localhost............................................................................................................................ 84
Create a Server from a VMware vSphere Host..........................................................................................................85
Create a Server from a VMware vCenter Host..........................................................................................................85
Modifying Servers............................................................................................................................................................ 86
Apply One or More Snapshot Profiles to a Server......................................................................................................86
Add a Server to a Server Cluster................................................................................................................................86
Remove a Server from a Server Cluster.....................................................................................................................86
Convert a Physical Server to a Virtual Server............................................................................................................ 86
Convert a Virtual Server to a Physical Server.............................................................................................................87
Rename a Server........................................................................................................................................................87
Change the Operating System of a Server.................................................................................................................87

5
 Move a Server to a Different Server Folder............................................................................................................... 87
Add One or More HBAs to a Server........................................................................................................................... 87
Remove One or More HBAs from a Server................................................................................................................ 88
Mapping Volumes to Servers........................................................................................................................................... 88
Map a Volume to a Server..........................................................................................................................................88
Unmap One or More Volumes From a Server.............................................................................................................89
Create a Volume and Map it to a Server.................................................................................................................... 89
Create Multiple Volumes Simultaneously and Map Them to a Server.........................................................................89
Creating and Managing Server Folders............................................................................................................................ 90
Create a Server Folder...............................................................................................................................................90
Rename a Server Folder.............................................................................................................................................90
Move a Server Folder................................................................................................................................................. 91
Deleting Servers and Server Folders................................................................................................................................. 91
Delete a Server........................................................................................................................................................... 91
Delete a Server Folder................................................................................................................................................ 91
Managing Servers on a Storage Center............................................................................................................................ 91

6 Storage Center Maintenance........................................................................................ 93

Managing Storage Center Settings.................................................................................................................................. 93
Viewing and Modifying Storage Center Information...................................................................................................93
Modifying Storage Center Network Settings............................................................................................................. 94
Configuring Storage Center User Preferences...........................................................................................................95
Configure Dell Storage Manager Client User Settings................................................................................................ 97
Configuring Storage Center Data Settings.................................................................................................................98
Configuring Storage Center Secure Console Settings................................................................................................99
Configuring Storage Center SMTP Settings.............................................................................................................. 99
Configuring Storage Center SNMP Settings............................................................................................................ 100
Configuring Storage Center Time Settings................................................................................................................101
Configuring Filters to Restrict Administrative Access................................................................................................ 101
Managing Storage Center Users and Groups................................................................................................................. 103
User Privilege Levels.................................................................................................................................................103
User Groups............................................................................................................................................................. 103
User Account Management and Authentication....................................................................................................... 103
Managing Local Storage Center Users..................................................................................................................... 105
Managing Local Storage Center User Groups........................................................................................................... 110
Enabling Directory Services Authentication............................................................................................................... 112
Managing Directory Service Users.............................................................................................................................112
Managing Local Storage Center User Password Requirements.................................................................................116
Managing Directory User Groups...............................................................................................................................117
Managing Front-End IO Ports......................................................................................................................................... 118
Front-End Connectivity Modes................................................................................................................................. 118
Fault Domains............................................................................................................................................................119
Failover Behavior...................................................................................................................................................... 120
Rebalancing Front-End Ports.................................................................................................................................... 121
Managing Front-End IO Port Hardware.....................................................................................................................121
Grouping Fibre Channel IO Ports Using Fault Domains................................................................................................... 124

6
 Create a Fibre Channel Fault Domain........................................................................................................................125
Rename a Fibre Channel Fault Domain..................................................................................................................... 125
Delete a Fibre Channel Fault Domain........................................................................................................................ 125
Grouping iSCSI IO Ports Using Fault Domains................................................................................................................ 126
iSCSI VLAN Tagging Support................................................................................................................................... 126
Creating iSCSI Fault Domains................................................................................................................................... 126
Modifying iSCSI Fault Domains................................................................................................................................. 128
Configuring NAT Port Forwarding for iSCSI Fault Domains...................................................................................... 132
Configuring CHAP for iSCSI Fault Domains.............................................................................................................. 134
Grouping SAS IO Ports Using Fault Domains.................................................................................................................. 135
Create a SAS Fault Domain.......................................................................................................................................135
Delete a SAS Fault Domain....................................................................................................................................... 135
Managing Disks and Disk Folders.................................................................................................................................... 135
Disk Management on SCv2000 Series Controllers....................................................................................................136
Scan for New Disks.................................................................................................................................................. 136
Create a Disk Folder................................................................................................................................................. 136
Delete Disk Folder..................................................................................................................................................... 137
Modify a Disk Folder................................................................................................................................................. 137
Manage Unassigned Disks.........................................................................................................................................137
Enable or Disable the Disk Indicator Light................................................................................................................. 137
Release a Disk...........................................................................................................................................................138
Cancel Releasing a Disk............................................................................................................................................ 138
Delete a Disk............................................................................................................................................................. 138
Restore a Disk...........................................................................................................................................................139
Replace a Failed Disk................................................................................................................................................ 139
Managing Secure Data................................................................................................................................................... 139
How Secure Data Works...........................................................................................................................................139
Configure Key Server............................................................................................................................................... 140
Create Secure Data Disk Folder.................................................................................................................................141
Managing Data Redundancy............................................................................................................................................141
Managing RAID..........................................................................................................................................................141
Managing Storage Types.......................................................................................................................................... 142
Managing Disk Enclosures.............................................................................................................................................. 143
Add an Enclosure...................................................................................................................................................... 143
Remove an Enclosure............................................................................................................................................... 144
Replace an Enclosure................................................................................................................................................144
Rename a Disk Enclosure..........................................................................................................................................145
Set an Asset Tag for a Disk Enclosure...................................................................................................................... 145
Delete an Enclosure.................................................................................................................................................. 145
Mute an Enclosure Alarm..........................................................................................................................................145
Unmute an Enclosure Alarm......................................................................................................................................146
Clear the Swap Status for an Enclosure Cooling Fan................................................................................................146
Clear the Swap Status for an Enclosure IO Module.................................................................................................. 146
Clear the Swap Status for an Enclosure Power Supply.............................................................................................146
Clear the Under Voltage Status for a Power Supply................................................................................................. 146

7
 Clear the Swap Status for a Temperature Sensor.................................................................................................... 146
Clear the Minimum and Maximum Recorded Values for Temperature Sensor.......................................................... 146
Enable or Disable the Disk Indicator Light................................................................................................................. 147
Clear the Swap Status for a Disk.............................................................................................................................. 147
Managing Storage Center Controllers.............................................................................................................................147
Add a Controller........................................................................................................................................................ 147
Replace a Failed Controller........................................................................................................................................147
Enable or Disable a Controller Indicator Light............................................................................................................148
Replace a Failed Cooling Fan Sensor.........................................................................................................................148
Replace a Failed Power Supply................................................................................................................................. 148
Managing IO Card Changes...................................................................................................................................... 148
Updating Storage Center................................................................................................................................................150
Update Storage Center Software.............................................................................................................................150
Using the Storage Center Update Utility.................................................................................................................. 150
Shutting Down and Restarting a Storage Center............................................................................................................ 151
Shut Down All Controllers in Storage Center.............................................................................................................151
Restart All Controllers in a Storage Center............................................................................................................... 152
Shut Down a Controller............................................................................................................................................ 152
Restart a Controller.................................................................................................................................................. 152
Reset an SCv2000 series controller to Factory Default............................................................................................ 152
Managing Field Replaceable Units (FRU)........................................................................................................................153
Managing FRU Tickets............................................................................................................................................. 153

7 Viewing Storage Center Information............................................................................155

Viewing Summary Information........................................................................................................................................155
Viewing Summary Information for a Storage Center................................................................................................ 155
Using the Status Plugin............................................................................................................................................ 155
Using the Storage Summary Plugin...........................................................................................................................157
Using the Current Alerts Plugin................................................................................................................................ 158
Viewing Detailed Storage Usage Information..................................................................................................................159
View Storage Usage by Tier and RAID Type............................................................................................................. 159
View Storage Usage by Volumes.............................................................................................................................. 159
View Historical Storage Usage..................................................................................................................................160
View a Data Progression Pressure Report................................................................................................................. 161
Viewing Current IO Performance....................................................................................................................................162
Using the Charting Tab.............................................................................................................................................162
Configuring Chart Options........................................................................................................................................163
Viewing Storage Logs..................................................................................................................................................... 164
Select the Date Range of Log Events to Display.......................................................................................................164
Search for Events in the Storage Logs..................................................................................................................... 165
Viewing Storage System Alerts...................................................................................................................................... 165
Search for Storage Alerts......................................................................................................................................... 165
Acknowledge Storage Center Alerts.........................................................................................................................166
Exporting Usage Data.....................................................................................................................................................166
Export Storage Usage Data...................................................................................................................................... 166
Export IO Usage Data............................................................................................................................................... 167

8
Monitoring Storage Center Hardware.............................................................................................................................168
Monitoring a Storage Center Controller....................................................................................................................168
Monitoring a Storage Center Disk Enclosure.............................................................................................................170
Monitoring SSD Endurance.......................................................................................................................................172
Viewing UPS Status..................................................................................................................................................173

9
10
About This Guide
This guide describes how to use Dell Storage Manager Client to manage and monitor a Storage Center.
For information about installing and configuring required Dell Storage Manager Client components, see the Dell Enterprise Manager
Installation Guide.

How to Find Information

To Find Action
A description of a field or option in the user In Storage Manager, click Help.
interface

Tasks that can be performed from a

1. In Storage Manager, click Help.
particular area of the user interface
2. See the Related Tasks section at the bottom of the topic.

A term in a .pdf file Using Adobe Acrobat or Adobe Reader:

• To find a matching term, press Control+F, type the search term, then press
Enter.
• To find all matching terms, press Control+Shift+F, type the term in the search
field, then click Search.

Contacting Dell
Go to www.dell.com/support.

Revision History
Document number: 680-106-005

Revision Date Description

A January 2017 Initial release

Audience
Storage administrators make up the target audience for this document. The intended reader has a working knowledge of storage
and networking concepts.

Related Publications
The following documentation is available for Dell storage components managed using Storage Manager.

Storage Manager Documents

• Dell Storage Manager Installation Guide
Contains installation and setup information.
• Dell Storage Manager Administrator’s Guide
Contains in-depth feature configuration and usage information.

About This Guide 11

• Dell Storage Manager Web UI Administrator’s Guide
Contains instructions and information for managing

Dell storage devices using the Dell Storage Manager Web UI.
• Dell Storage Manager Release Notes
Provides information about Storage Manager releases, including new features and enhancements, open issues, and resolved
issues.
• Dell Storage Manager Online Help
Provides context-sensitive help for the Client, Data Collector Manager, and Server Agent.
• Dell Storage REST API Getting Started Guide
Contains command examples and usage instructions for the Dell Storage REST API.
• Dell Storage API PowerShell SDK Getting Started Guide
Contains setup instructions and examples for the Dell Storage API for PowerShell.

Storage Center Documents

• Storage Center Release Notes
Contains information about features and open and resolved issues for a particular product version.
• Storage Center Deployment Guide
Provides cabling instructions for Storage Center controllers, switches, and enclosures and provides instructions for configuring a
new Dell Storage Center.
• Storage Center Software Update Guide
Describes how to update Storage Center software from an earlier version to the current version.
• Storage Center Update Utility Administrator’s Guide
Describes how to update Storage Center software on Storage Center controllers. Updating Storage Center software using the
Storage Center Update Utility is intended for use only by sites that cannot update Storage Center using the standard update
options available through Dell Storage Manager.
• Storage Center Command Utility Reference Guide
Provides instructions for using the Storage Center Command Utility. The Command Utility provides a command-line interface
(CLI) to enable management of Storage Center functionality on Windows, Linux, Solaris, and AIX platforms.
• Storage Center Command Set for Windows PowerShell
Provides instructions for getting started with Windows PowerShell cmdlets and scripting objects that interact with the Storage
Center via the PowerShell interactive shell, scripts, and hosting applications. Help for individual cmdlets is available online.

FluidFS Cluster Documents

• Dell FluidFS Version 5.0 FS8600 Appliance Pre-Deployment Requirements
Provides a checklist that assists in preparing to deploy an FS8600 appliance prior to a Dell installer or certified business partner
arriving on site to perform an FS8600 appliance installation. The target audience for this document is Dell installers and certified
business partners who perform FS8600 appliance installations.
• Dell FluidFS Version 5.0 FS8600 Appliance Deployment Guide
Provides information about deploying an FS8600 appliance, including cabling the appliance to the Storage Center(s) and the
network, and deploying the appliance using the Storage Manager software. The target audience for this document is Dell
installers and certified business partners who perform FS8600 appliance installations.
• Dell FluidFS Version 5.0 Administrator’s Guide
Provides information about using the Storage Manager software to manage FS8600 appliances, and provides information about
FS8600 appliance monitoring and troubleshooting. The target audience for this document is customers.
• Dell FluidFS 5.0 FS8600 Appliance CLI Reference Guide
Provides information about the FS8600 appliance command-line interface. The target audience for this document is customers.
• Dell FS8600 Appliance FluidFS Version 5.0 Software Update Guide

12
 Provides information about upgrading the FluidFS software from version 2.0 to 3.0. The target audience for this document is
customers.
• Dell FluidFS Version 5.0 Release Notes
Provides information about FluidFS releases, including new features and enhancements, open issues, and resolved issues. The
target audience for this document is customers.
• Dell FS8600 Appliance Service Guide
Provides information about FS8600 appliance hardware, system component replacement, and system troubleshooting. The
target audience for this document is Dell installers and certified business partners who perform FS8600 appliance hardware
service.
• Dell NAS Appliance SFP+ Replacement Procedure
Provides information about replacing SFP+ transceivers on an inactive system. The target audience for this document is Dell
installers and certified business partners who perform FS8600 appliance hardware service.
• Dell FluidFS FS8600 Appliance 1Gb to 10Gb Upgrade Procedure
Provides information about upgrading a Fibre Channel FS8600 appliance from 1Gb Ethernet client connectivity to 10Gb Ethernet
client connectivity. The target audience for this document is Dell installers and certified business partners who perform FS8600
appliance hardware service.

Fluid Cache Cluster Documents

• Dell Fluid Cache for SAN Deployment Guide for VMware ESXi Systems
Describes the process of deploying Fluid Cache for SAN, including system requirements, installation procedures, and
troubleshooting. Includes additional procedures specific to configuring Fluid Cache clusters in VMware environments.
• Dell Fluid Cache for SAN Deployment Guide for Linux Systems
Describes the process of deploying Fluid Cache for SAN, including system requirements, installation procedures, and
troubleshooting. Includes requirements specific to supported Linux distributions.
• Dell Fluid Cache for SAN Release Notes
Documents known issues and lists the most current software and hardware requirements.

Dell TechCenter
Provides technical white papers, best practice guides, and frequently asked questions about Dell Storage products. Go to: http://
en.community.dell.com/techcenter/storage/

About This Guide 13

14
 1
Getting Started
The Dell Storage Manager Client can connect to a Storage Center to manage storage and monitor storage usage and hardware.
NOTE: To use the full set of Storage Manager features, set up and connect to a Data Collector. When connected
directly to a Storage Center, you cannot use features like replications, FluidFS, and managing multiple Storage Centers.
For more information on installing and configuring a Data Collector, see the Storage Manager Installation Guide. For
more information on using Storage Manager with a Data Collector, see the Storage Manager Administrator’s Guide.

Connect to a Storage Center with the Dell Storage Manager Client

Use the Dell Storage Manager Client to connect directly to a Storage Center.
Prerequisites
The Dell Storage Manager Client must be installed on the computer you are using. For installation instructions, see the Storage
Manager Installation Guide.
Steps
1. Start the Dell Storage Manager Client application. The Dell Storage Manager Client appears.
2. If the Welcome page appears, select a language from the Display Language drop-down menu then click Log into a Storage
Center or Data Collector.
The Dell Storage Manager Client login page appears.

Figure 1. Dell Storage Manager Client Login

3. To change the language displayed in the Dell Storage Manager Client, select a language from the Display Language drop-down
menu.
4. Type the user name and password in the User Name and Password fields.
5. In the Host/IP field, type the host name or IP address of the Storage Center.
6. If you changed the Web Server Port during installation, type the updated port in the Web Server Port field.
7. Click Log In. The Client connects to the Storage Center and displays the Summary tab.

Getting Started 15
 Figure 2. Dell Storage Manager Client Summary Tab

Related links
Next Steps

Dell Storage Manager Client Requirements

The following table lists the requirements for the Dell Storage Manager Client.

Component Requirements
Operating system Any of the following 32-bit or 64-bit operating systems (with the latest service packs):
• Windows 8
• Windows 8.1
• Windows 10

Any of the following 64-bit operating systems:

• Windows Server 2008 R2

• Windows Server 2012
• Windows Server 2012 R2
• Windows Server 2016
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6.7
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7.1
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux 7.2
• SUSE Linux Enterprise 12
• Oracle Linux 6.5
• Oracle Linux 7.0

NOTE: Windows Server Core is not supported.

CPU 32-bit (x86) or 64-bit (x64) microprocessor

NOTE: Linux versions of the Dell Storage Manager Client support only 64-bit microprocessors.

Software Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 (Windows only)

16 Getting Started
Component Requirements
Web browser Any of the following web browsers:
• Internet Explorer 11
• Firefox
• Google Chrome
• Microsoft Edge

NOTE: Other web browsers may work but are not officially supported.

Next Steps
This section describes common tasks that you can perform after installing the Dell Storage Manager Client and connecting to a
Storage Center.

Change the Admin Password

The default password for the Admin user is mmm. To improve the security on the Storage Center, change the password for the
Admin user.
Related links
Change the Password for a Local Storage Center User
Managing Storage Center Users and Groups

Create Volumes
To use the storage on the Storage Center, allocate space on the disks by creating volumes.
Related links
Creating Volumes

Create Servers
Create a server to allow a Storage Center to pass IO through the ports on that server. After a server is created, volumes can be
mapped to it.
Related links
Creating Servers

Map Volumes to Servers

Map volumes to servers to allow the servers to use the volume for storage.
Related links
Mapping Volumes to Servers

Monitor Alerts
Alerts represent current issues present in the Storage Center. Monitor alerts to remain aware of the status of the Storage Center.
Related links
Viewing Storage System Alerts

Monitor Storage Usage

Storage usage information is available from the Storage Types and Volumes nodes in the Storage tab. Monitor storage usage to
ensure that storage is being used as intended.
Related links
Viewing Detailed Storage Usage Information

Getting Started 17
18
 2
Storage Center Overview
Storage Center is a storage area network (SAN) that provides centralized, block-level storage that can be accessed by Fibre
Channel, iSCSI, or Serial Attached SCSI (SAS).

Storage Center Hardware Components

Dell Storage Center consists of one or two controllers, switches, and may include one or more disk enclosures.

Controllers
A Storage Center controller provides the central processing capability for the Storage Center Operating System and managing RAID
storage. A Storage Center can be configured with a single controller or a pair of controllers. In a dual-controller Storage Center
configuration, the two controllers must be the same model.
IO cards in the controller provide communication with disk enclosures and servers that use the storage. Controllers provide two
types of IO ports:

• Front-end ports: Hosts, servers, or Network Attached Storage (NAS) appliances access storage by connecting to controller
Fibre Channel IO cards, FCoE IO cards, or iSCSI IO through one or more network switches. SAS ports, designated as front-end
ports, can be connected directly to a server on SCv2000 series storage systems. Ports for these connections are located on the
back of the controller, but are configured as front-end ports.
• Back-end ports: Enclosures, which hold the physical drives that provide back-end storage, connect directly to the controller.
Fibre Channel and SAS transports are supported through ports designated as back-end ports. Back-end ports are in their own
private network between the controllers and the drive enclosures.

Switches
Switches provide robust connectivity to servers, allowing for the use of multiple controllers and redundant transport paths. Cabling
between controller IO cards, switches, and servers is referred to as front-end connectivity.

Enclosures
Enclosures house and control drives that provide storage. Enclosures are connected directly to controller IO cards. These
connections are referred to as back-end connectivity.
Fibre Channel Switched Bunch of Disks (SBOD) and Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) enclosures are supported for
existing Storage Centers and for controller migrations only.

How Storage Virtualization Works

Storage Center virtualizes storage by grouping disks into pools of storage called Storage Types, which hold small chunks (pages) of
data. Block-level storage is allocated for use by defining volumes and mapping them to servers. The Storage Type and Storage
Profile associated with the volume determines how a volume uses storage.
Storage Center combines the following features to provide virtualized storage.

• Volumes: Allocate storage for use.

• Storage Types: Define a datapage size and redundancy levels for the disk folder.
• Data Progression: Moves pages between tiers and drive types, as well as among multiple RAID levels within the same tier.
• Storage Profiles: Defines how data progression moves pages between tiers.

Storage Center Overview 19

Disk Management
Storage Center manages both physical disks and the data movement within the virtual disk pool. Disks are organized physically,
logically, and virtually.

• Physically: Disks are grouped by the enclosure in which they reside, as shown in the Enclosures folder.
• Logically: Disks are grouped by class in disk folders. Storage Center enclosures may contain any combination of disk classes.
• Virtually: All disk space is allocated into tiers. The fastest disks reside in Tier 1 and slower drives with lower performance reside in
Tier 3. Data that is accessed frequently remains on Tier 1, and data that has not been accessed for the last 12 progression cycles
is gradually migrated to Tiers 2 and 3. Data is promoted to a higher tier after three days of consistent activity. Disk tiering is
shown when you select a Storage Type.

Disk Folders
A disk folder contains both managed and spare drives. Managed drives are used for data storage. Spare drives are held in reserve to
automatically replace a drive if a drive fails. By default, the Assigned disk folder is the parent disk folder for all drives. Drives are
further grouped by class in subordinate folders.

Disk Classes
Disks are classified based on their performance characteristics. Each class is shown in a separate folder within the Assigned disk
folder.

• Hard Disk Drives (HDDs): For HDDs, the disk classification describes its spindle speed and can be any of three disk types.

– 7K (7200 RPM)
– 10K
– 15K
• Solid State Devices (SSDs): SSDs are differentiated by read or write optimization.

– Write-intensive (SLC SSD)

– Mixed-Use (MU SSD)
– Read-intensive (MLC SSD)

Disk Management for SC7020

Storage Center manages disks for SC7020 automatically. When configuring an SC7020, Storage Center manages the disks into
folders based on function of the disk. FIPS capable drives are managed into a separate folder than other disks. When Storage
Center detects new disks, it manages the disk into the appropriate folder.
Storage Center disables the automatic disk management function when a user creates a new disk folder. Deleting the user-created
disk folder enables the automatic disk management function. The automatic disk management function will not automatically
manage any disk that has been previously released by Storage Center. If you are attempting to manage a previously released disk,
you must manually manage the disk into the appropriate folder.

Drive Spares
Drive spares are drives that Storage Center reserves to replace a drive when one fails. When a drive fails, Storage Center restripes
the data across the remaining drives using the spare drive as a replacement for the failed drive.
Storage Center designates at least one drive spare for each disk class. For SCv2000 and SC7020,Storage Center groups drives into
groups of no more than 21 drives. Storage Center designates one drive in each group of drives as a spare drive. For example, a disk
class containing 21 drives will have 20 managed drives and one spare drive. A disk class with 22 drives will have 20 managed drives
and two spare drives. Storage Center designates the one additional drive as a spare drive.Storage Center designates the largest
drives in the disk class as spare drives.

20 Storage Center Overview

Volumes
A Storage Center volume is a logical unit of storage that can represent more logical space than is physically available on the Storage
Center. Before data can be written to a volume, it must be mapped to a server, then formatted as a drive. Depending on the
configuration of the server, data can be written to the volume over iSCSI or Fibre Channel.
The Storage Type and Storage Profile selected when the volume is created determines how a volume behaves. The Storage Type
sets the datapage size and redundancy levels. The Storage Profile determines how Data Progression moves pages on the volume
between tiers and RAID levels.

Storage Types
A Storage Type is a pool of storage with a single datapage size and specified redundancy levels. Storage Center assesses the disks
available in a disk folder and presents the applicable Storage Type options. Once the determination is made, it cannot be changed
without assistance from Dell Technical Support, even when disk types change.
NOTE: SCv2000 series controllers manage Storage Types automatically by assigning each disk class to a new Storage
Type. SSD Storage Types have a 512 K datapage size and HDD Storage Types have a 2 MB datapage size.

Disk Types

The types of disks present in Storage Center define whether a system is considered Standard or Flash Optimized. This classification
further determines how Data Progression moves data between tiers.

A minimum of six SSDs are required for a Flash Optimized array. When two types of SSDs are present, the array must contain at
least six of each type.

Storage Type Disk Classes

Standard • Write-intensive SSDs + HDDs
• HDDs (7K, 10K, 15K)

Flash Optimized • Write-intensive SSDs

• Write-intensive SSDs + Read-intensive SSDs
• Write-intensive SSDs + Read-intensive SSDs + HDDs

Datapage Size
By default, data is migrated between tiers and RAID levels in 2 MB blocks. Data can be moved in smaller or larger blocks to meet
specific application requirements. These blocks are referred to as datapages.

• 2 MB: Default datapage size, this selection is appropriate for most applications.
• 512 KB: Appropriate for applications with high performance needs, or in environments in which snapshots are taken frequently
under heavy IO. Selecting this size increases overhead and reduces the maximum available space in the Storage Type. Flash
Optimized storage types use 512 KB by default.
• 4 MB: Appropriate for systems that use a large amount of disk space with infrequent snapshots.
CAUTION: Before changing the datapage setting, contact Dell Technical Support to discuss the impact on
performance and for advice about how to ensure that system resources remain balanced.

Redundancy
Redundancy levels provide fault tolerance for a drive failure.

• Non-redundant: Uses RAID 0 in all classes, in all tiers. Data is striped but provides no redundancy. If one drive fails, all data is
lost. Do not use non-redundant storage for a volume unless the data has been backed up elsewhere.
• Single-redundant: Protects against the loss of any one drive. Single-redundant tiers can contain any of the following types of
RAID storage.

– RAID 10 (each drive is mirrored)

Storage Center Overview 21

 – RAID 5-5 (striped across 5 drives)
– RAID 5-9 (striped across 9 drives)
• Dual-redundant: Protects against the loss of any two drives. Dual-redundant tiers can contain any of the following types of
RAID storage.

– RAID 10 Dual-Mirror (data is written simultaneously to three separate drives)

– RAID 6-6 (4 data segments, 2 parity segments for each stripe)
– RAID 6-10 (8 data segments, 2 parity segments for each stripe)

Redundancy options may be restricted depending on the drive size. For example, there may be instances when a tier must be dual-
redundant and cannot be non-redundant or single-redundant. These restrictions are described in Redundancy Level
Recommendations and Requirements

Redundancy Level Recommendations and Requirements

Drive size is used to determine the redundancy level to apply to a tier of drives.
If any drive in a tier surpasses a threshold size, a specific redundancy level can be applied to the tier containing that drive. The
following tables describe HDD and SSD redundancy level defaults and requirements for Storage Center 7.1. If a redundancy level is
required, theStorage Center operating system sets the level and it cannot be changed.

NOTE: For SC7000 series Storage Centers, the dual redundancy level is the default for all drives. For other models of
Storage Centers, the single redundancy level is the default.
Table 1. HDD Redundancy Recommendations and Requirements

Drive Size Redundancy Level

Up to 966 GB For most models of Storage Centers, single redundancy is the
default when adding drives of this size to a new or existing page
pool.

NOTE: The default for SC7000 series Storage Centers

for drives of this size is dual-redundant.

967 GB up to a maximum 1.93 TB Dual redundancy is the default when adding drives of this size to
a new or existing page pool.

1.94 TB and higher Dual redundancy is required when adding drives of this size to a
new page pool.

NOTE: For SC7000 series Storage Centers, dual

redundancy is required when adding drives of this size to
new or existing page pools.

2.79 TB and higher Dual redundancy is required when adding drives of this size to
an existing page pool.

Table 2. SSD Redundancy Recommendations and Requirements

Drive Size Redundancy Level

Up to 1.7 TB for WI and RI For most models of Storage Centers, single redundancy is the
default when adding drives of this size to a new or existing page
pool.

NOTE: The default for SC7000 series Storage Centers

for drives of this size is dual-redundant.

1.8 TB up to 3.9 TB for WI and RI Dual redundancy is the default when adding drives of this size to
a new or existing page pool.

22 Storage Center Overview

Drive Size Redundancy Level
4 TB and higher for WI and RI Dual redundancy is required when adding drives of this size to a
new or existing page pool.

Data Progression
Storage Center uses Data Progression to move data within a virtualized storage environment. Data Progression moves data
between tiers and drive types, as well as among multiple RAID levels within the same tier, for a constant balance of performance
and cost.

How Data Progression Works

Once every 24 hours, Storage Center assesses disk use and moves data to disk space that is more efficient for the data usage. By
default, Data Progression runs each day at 7 PM system time, but the timing of the run can be changed in the Storage Center
settings. Data Progression behavior is determined by the Storage Profile applied to each volume.

NOTE: With SCv2000 series controllers, Data Progression moves data between RAID types and restripes RAID, but does
not move data between storage tiers.

Data Progression and Snapshots

Storage Center also uses Data Progression to move snapshots. When a snapshot is created, either as scheduled or manually, the
data is frozen and moved to the tier specified by the Storage Profile to hold snapshots.

Snapshots can occur as a scheduled event according to the Snapshot Profile, manually by creating a snapshot, or on demand by
Storage Center to move data off of Tier 1 in a Flash Optimized storage type.

Low Space Modes

A Storage Center enters Conservation Mode when free space becomes critically low and enters Emergency Mode when the system
can no longer operate because there is not enough free space.

Conservation Mode
A Storage Center enters Conservation Mode when free space becomes critically low. Immediate action is necessary to avoid
entering Emergency Mode.
NOTE: Because of Conservation Mode’s proximity to the emergency threshold, do not use it as a tool to manage storage
or to plan adding disks to the Storage Center.
In Conservation Mode, Dell Storage Manager Client responds with the following actions:

• Generates a Conservation Mode alert.

• Expires Snapshots at a faster rate than normal.
• Prevents new volume creation.

Emergency Mode
Storage Center enters Emergency Mode when the system can no longer operate because it does not have enough free space.
In Emergency Mode, Dell Storage Manager Client responds with the following actions:

• Generates an Emergency Mode alert.

• Expires Snapshots at a faster rate than normal.
• Prevents new volume creation.
• Volumes are taken offline. Data cannot be written to or read from volumes.

To support recovery efforts, volumes can respond to Space Recovery requests from the server or Storage Manager to release
unused blocks of data.

Storage Center Overview 23

 CAUTION: Because Emergency Mode prevents all server IO, Emergency Mode is service affecting. Administrators must
take special care to continually monitor free space on the Storage Center and add or free up space as needed to avoid
reaching the Emergency Mode threshold.

Troubleshoot Conservation or Emergency Mode

To resolve conservation or emergency mode, reclaim consumed disk space.
About this task
Perform each step, then wait a few minutes and check available disk space.
Steps
1. Delete any unnecessary volumes and then empty the recycle bin.
2. Expire unnecessary Snapshots.
3. If applicable, run a manual space recovery on Windows server volumes.

Next steps
If these steps do not resolve conservation or emergency mode, contact Dell Technical Support.

Preventing Low Space Modes

Manage disk space to prevent a Storage Center from entering Conservation or Emergency mode.
Prevent low space issues using these tips:

• Empty the recycle bin regularly.

• Lower the frequency of snapshots or set snapshots to expire earlier.
• Change the storage profile to a more space efficient profile. Available profiles might include Low Priority (Tier 3) and Maximize
Efficiency.
• Configure a threshold definition to create an alert when space starts to get low.
• Run Space Recovery on Windows volumes through the Storage Manager Server Agent.
• Migrate volumes from a pagepool with a full tier to a different pagepool with more free space.
• Delete any unnecessary volumes.
• If Data Reduction is licensed, enable Compression or Deduplication with Compression on some volumes.

Storage Profiles
Storage Profiles control how Storage Center manages volume data. For a given volume, the selected Storage Profile dictates which
disk tier accepts initial writes, as well as how data progression moves data between tiers to balance performance and cost.
Predefined Storage Profiles are the most effective way to manage data in Storage Center. The Storage Profiles available are
determined by the Storage Type.
The ability to select Storage Profiles is controlled by user settings. Storage Profiles may not be visible to all users. If your user
volume defaults allow you to select a Storage Profile, the Storage tab displays them under the Storage Profiles node.

Storage Profiles for Standard Storage Types

The table below summarizes the Storage Profiles available for Standard storage types. Each profile is described in more detail
following the table.

Name Initial Write Tier Tier (T) and RAID Levels Progression
Recommended (All Tiers) 1 Writes: T1 RAID 10 Snapshots: Yes - to all Tiers
RAID 5/RAID 6
High Priority (Tier 1) 1 Writes: T1 RAID 10 Snapshots: No
T1 RAID 5/RAID 6
Medium Priority (Tier 2) 2 Writes: T2 RAID 10 Snapshots: No
T2 RAID 5/RAID 6
Low Priority (Tier 3) 3 Writes: T3 RAID 10 Snapshots: No
T3 RAID 5/RAID 6

24 Storage Center Overview

 NOTE: The Recommended, High Priority, and Medium Priority profiles are not available for the Flash Optimized Storage
Type.

Recommended (All Tiers)

The Recommended Storage Profile is available only when Data Progression is licensed. Cost and performance are optimized when
all volumes use the Recommended Storage Profile. The Recommended profile allows automatic Data Progression between and
across all storage tiers based on data type and usage.

When a volume uses the Recommended Profile, all new data is written to Tier 1 RAID level 10 storage. Data Progression moves less
active data to Tier 1 RAID5/ RAID 6 or a slower tier based on how frequently the data is accessed. In this way, the most active
blocks of data remain on high-performance drives, while less active blocks automatically move to lower-cost, high-capacity SAS
drives.

Because SSDs are automatically assigned to Storage Tier 1, profiles that include Storage Tier 1 allow volumes to use SSD storage. If
you have volumes that contain data that is not accessed frequently, and do not require the performance of Tier 1 SSDs, use a
Medium or Low Priority Profile or create and apply a new profile that does not include Storage Tier 1.

High Priority (Tier 1)

The High Priority Storage Profile provides the highest performance by storing data on Tier 1. It is efficient in terms of using RAID 5
or 6, but it uses more expensive media to store the data. A volume created using the High Priority profile stores written data on
Tier 1 RAID 10. Snapshot data is stored on Tier 1 RAID 5/RAID 6. Storage Center does not migrate data to lower storage tiers unless
Tier 1 storage becomes full.

If Data Progression is not licensed, the default Storage Profile is High Priority. Without Data Progression, you must configure
volumes to use a specific tier of storage, because data will not migrate between tiers.

Medium Priority (Tier 2)

The Medium Priority Storage Profile provides a balance between performance and cost efficiency. A volume created using the
Medium Priority profile stores written data on Tier 2 RAID 10. Snapshot data is stored on Tier 2 RAID 5/RAID 6. Storage Center
does not migrate data to other storage tiers unless Tier 2 storage becomes full.

Low Priority (Tier 3)

The Low Priority profile provides the most cost efficient storage. Creating a volume using the Low Priority profile stores written
data on Tier 3 RAID 10. Snapshot data is stored on Tier 3 RAID 5/6. Storage Center does not migrate data to higher tiers of storage
unless Tier 3 storage becomes full.

Storage Profiles for Flash Optimized Storage

The table below summarizes Storage Profiles available for Flash Optimized storage types. Each profile is described in more detail
following the table.

Name Initial Write Tier Tier (T) and RAID Levels Progression
Low Priority (Tier 3) 3 Writes: T3 RAID 10 snapshots: No
T3 RAID 5/6
Flash Optimized with 1 Writes: T1 RAID 10 snapshots: Yes to all tiers
Progression (Tier 1 to All Tiers) T2/T3 RAID 5/6
Write Intensive (Tier 1) 1 Writes: T1 RAID 10 snapshots: No
T1 RAID 10
Flash Only with Progression 1 Writes: T1 RAID 10 snapshots: Yes to Tier 2 only
(Tier 1 to Tier 2) T2 RAID 5
Low Priority with Progression 3 Writes: T3 RAID 10 snapshots: Yes to Tier 2 only
(Tier 3 to Tier 2) T3 RAID 5/6 or T2 RAID 5

Storage Center Overview 25

Low Priority (Tier 3)
The Low Priority profile provides the most cost efficient storage. Creating a volume using the Low Priority profile stores written
data on Tier 3 RAID 10. Snapshot data is stored on Tier 3 RAID 5/6. Storage Center does not migrate data to higher tiers of storage
unless Tier 3 storage becomes full.

Flash Optimized with Progression (Tier 1 to All Tiers)

The Flash Optimized with Progression Storage Profile provides the most efficient storage for an enclosure containing both read-
intensive and write-intensive SSDs. When a storage type uses this profile, all new data is written to write-intensive Tier 1 drives.
Snapshot data is moved to Tier 2, and less-active data progresses to Tier 3.

If Tier 1 fills to within 95% of capacity, Storage Center creates a space management snapshot and moves it immediately to Tier 2 to
free up space on Tier 1. The space management snapshot is moved immediately and does not wait for a scheduled Data
Progression. Space management snapshots are marked as Created On Demand and cannot be modified manually or used to create
View Volumes. Space management snapshots coalesce into the next scheduled or manual snapshot. Storage Center creates only
one on demand snapshot per volume at a time.

Write Intensive (Tier 1)

The Write Intensive Storage Profile directs all initial writes to write-intensive SSDs on Tier 1 (RAID 10). The data does not progress
to any other tier. This profile is useful for storing transaction logs and temporary database files.

Flash Only with Progression (Tier 1 to Tier 2)

The Flash Only with Progression Storage Profile performs initial writes on high-performance Tier 1 drives. Less active data
progresses to Tier 2, but remains on SSDs. This profile is useful for storing volumes with data that requires optimal read
performance, such as golden images, linked clones, and some databases.

Low Priority with Progression (Tier 3 to Tier 2)

The Low Priority with Progression Storage Profile directs initial writes to less expensive Tier 3 (RAID 10) drives, and then allows
frequently accessed data to progress to Tier 2. This profile is useful for migrating large amounts of data to Storage Center without
overloading Tier 1 SSDs.

Storage Virtualization for SCv2000 Series Controllers

SCv2000 series controllers manage many storage virtualization options automatically.

Disk Management on SCv2000 Series Controllers

Storage Centers with SCv2000 series controllers manage disks automatically, limiting the disk management options. After adding
disks, Storage Center recognizes the new disks, creates a new disk folder if necessary, then manages the disks in the disk folder. If
a disk is intentionally down for testing purposes, then is deleted, you can restore the disk to manage the disk again in a disk folder.
The following disk management options are not available with SCv2000 series controllers:

• Creating disk folders

• Adding disks to disk folders
• Managing disk spares

Related links
Restore a Disk

Storage Types for SCv2000 Series Controllers

SCv2000 series controllers create a Storage Type for each disk class, and manage Storage Types automatically.
SCv2000 series controllers manage Storage Types automatically in the following ways:

• Storage Types are created automatically for each disk class

26 Storage Center Overview

• Storage Types have a 2MB page size
• Storage Types cannot be modified
• Non-redundant Storage Types are not allowed

RAID Tiering for SCv2000 Series Controllers

RAID Tiering for SCv2000 series controllers moves data between RAID 10 and RAID 5/6. It does not move data between Storage
Tiers. RAID Tiering happens at 7 PM everyday. Data progression runs until it completes or reaches the maximum run time.

Storage Profiles for SCv2000 Series Controllers

The following table summarizes the Storage Profiles available to SCv2000 series controllers.

Name Initial Write Tier Tier (T) and RAID Levels RAID Tiering
Balanced 1 Writes: T1 RAID 10 Between RAID types only

Snapshots: T1 RAID 5/6

Maximize Performance 1 Writes: T1 RAID 10 No

Snapshots: T1 RAID 10

Maximize Efficiency 1 Writes: T1 RAID 5/6 No

Snapshots: T1 RAID 5/6

Balanced
The Balanced Storage Profile balances efficiency and performance for any volume using that Storage Profile.

When a volume uses the Balanced Storage Profile, all new data is written to Tier 1. When Storage Center creates a snapshot, Data
Progression moves snapshot data from RAID 10 to RAID 5/6.

Maximize Performance
Maximize Performance keeps new data and snapshot data on RAID 10 to increase performance. Maximize Performance is useful
for volumes with important and frequently used data.

Maximize Efficiency
Maximize Efficiency writes new data to RAID 5/6 and keeps snapshot data on RAID 5/6. Use Maximize Efficiency for volumes
with less-important data and infrequently used data.

User Interface for Storage Center Management

Most storage configuration and management for an individual Storage Center is performed from the Storage view in the Dell
Storage Manager Client. Select a Storage Center in the Storage navigation pane to view and manage it.
The following tabs appear in the display pane when a Storage Center is selected:

• Summary Tab
• Storage Tab
• Hardware Tab
• IO Usage Tab
• Charting Tab

Storage Center Overview 27

Summary Tab
The Summary tab displays a customizable dashboard that summarizes Storage Center information.

Figure 3. Summary Tab

Related links
Managing Storage Center Settings
Viewing Summary Information

Storage Tab
The Storage tab of the Storage view allows you to view and manage storage on the Storage Center. This tab is made up of two
elements: the navigation pane and the right pane.

Figure 4. Storage Tab

28 Storage Center Overview

Call Out Name
1 Navigation pane
2 Right pane

Navigation Pane
TheStorage tab navigation pane shows the following nodes:

• Storage Center: Shows a summary of current and historical storage usage on the selected Storage Center.
• Volumes: Allows you to create and manage volumes and volume folders on the selected Storage Center, as well as create a local
recovery from a volume snapshot. You can also create storage containers, which are used with virtual volumes.
• Servers: Allows you to create and manage physical and virtual servers, server clusters, and server folders on the selected
Storage Center.
• Remote Storage Centers: Allows you to create and view iSCSI connections to remote Storage Centers for which you have
access.
• Disks: Allows you to view and manage disks and disk folders on the selected Storage Center.
• Portable Volumes: Allows you to view and manage portable volumes, which are used to transport initial replication data to
remote Storage Centers. This option is useful when transferring the initial replication data over the network would be too slow.
• Storage Types: Allows you to view the Storage Types prepared on the selected Storage Center.
• Snapshot Profiles: Allows you to view, modify, and create Snapshot Profiles for the selected Storage Center, and apply
Snapshot Profiles to one or more volumes.
• Storage Profiles: Allows you to view and create Storage profiles defined on the selected Storage Center. This node appears
only if Allow Storage Profile Selection is enabled in the Storage Center user preferences.
• QoS Profiles: Allows you to define Quality of Service Profiles for volumes or groups of volumes on the selected Storage Center.
This node appears only if Allow QoS Profile Selection is enabled in the Storage Center user preferences.

Right Pane
The right pane shows information and configuration options for the node or object selected in the navigation pane. The information
and configuration options displayed for each node is described in the online help.

Related links
Managing Storage Center Settings
Managing Volumes
Managing Snapshot Profiles
Managing Servers on a Storage Center
Managing Storage Profiles
Managing QoS Profiles

Storage Center Overview 29

Hardware Tab
The Hardware tab of the Storage view displays status information for the Storage Center hardware and allows you to perform
hardware-related tasks.

Figure 5. Hardware Tab

Related links
Monitoring Storage Center Hardware
Managing Disk Enclosures
Shutting Down and Restarting a Storage Center

Charting Tab
The Charting tab of the Storage view displays real-time IO performance statistics for the selected storage object.

Figure 6. Charting Tab

Related links
Viewing Current IO Performance

30 Storage Center Overview

Alerts Tab
The Alerts tab displays alerts for the Storage Center.

Figure 7. Alerts Tab

Logs Tab
The Logs tab displays logs from the Storage Center.

Figure 8. Logs Tab

Storage Center Overview 31

32
 3
Storage Center Deployment
Use the Discover and Configure Uninitialized Storage Centers or Configure Storage Center wizard to set up a Storage Center to
make it ready for volume creation and storage management. After configuring a Storage Center, you can set up a localhost, or a
VMware vSphere or vCenter host.

Supported Operating Systems for Storage Center Automated Setup

Setting up a Storage Center requires 64-bit versions of the following operating systems:

• Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 or later

• SUSE Linux Enterprise 12 or later
• Windows Server 2008 R2 or later

Discovering and Configuring Uninitialized Storage Centers from the

Dell Storage Manager Client Welcome Screen
Open the Discover and Configure Uninitialized Storage Centers wizard from the Dell Storage Manager Client Welcome screen to set
up a Storage Center.

Discover and Configure Uninitialized SCv2000 Series Storage Centers from the Dell Storage
Manager Client Welcome Screen
When setting up the system, use the Discover and Configure Uninitialized SCv2000 Series Storage Centers wizard to find new
Storage Centers. The wizard helps set up a Storage Center to make it ready for volume creation.
Prerequisites
• Client must be running on a system with a 64-bit operating system.
• The Dell Storage Manager Client must be run using Windows Administrator privileges.

Steps
1. Open the Dell Storage Manager Client welcome screen.
2. Click Discover and Configure Uninitialized SCv2000 Series Storage Centers .
The Discover and Configure Uninitialized SCv2000 Series Storage Centers wizard appears.

Discover and Select an Uninitialized Storage Center

The first page of the Discover and Configure Uninitialized Storage Centers wizard provides a list of prerequisite actions and
information required before setting up a Storage Center.
Prerequisites
• The host server, on which the Storage Manager software is installed, must be on the same subnet or VLAN as the Storage
Center.
• Temporarily disable any firewall on the host server that is running the Storage Manager.
• Layer 2 multicast must be allowed on the network.
• Make sure that IGMP snooping is disabled on the switch ports connected to the Storage Center.

Storage Center Deployment 33

Steps
1. Make sure that you have the required information that is listed on the first page of the wizard. This information is needed to
configure the Storage Center.
2. Click Next. The Select a Storage Center to Initialize page appears and lists the uninitialized Storage Centers discovered by
the wizard.
NOTE: If the wizard does not discover the Storage Center that you want to initialize, perform one of the following
actions:
• Make sure that the Storage Center hardware is physically attached to all necessary networks.
• Click Rediscover.
• Click Troubleshoot Storage Center Hardware Issue to learn more about reasons why the Storage Center is not
discoverable.
• Click Manually Discover Storage Center via MAC Address to enter the MAC address for the Storage Center.
3. Select the Storage Center to initialize.
4. (Optional) Click Enable Storage Center Indicator to turn on the indicator light for the selected Storage Center. You can use
the indicator to verify that you have selected the correct Storage Center.
5. Click Next.
6. If the Storage Center is partially configured, the Storage Center login pane appears. Enter the management IPv4 address and
the Admin password for the Storage Center, then click Next to continue.

Set System Information

The Set System Information page allows you to enter Storage Center and storage controller configuration information to use when
connecting to the Storage Center using Storage Manager.

1. Type a descriptive name for the Storage Center in the Storage Center Name field.
2. Type the system management IPv4 address for the Storage Center in the Virtual Management IPv4 Address field.
The management IPv4 address is the IP address used to manage the Storage Center and is different from a storage controller
IPv4 address.
3. Type an IPv4 address for the management port of each storage controller.
NOTE: The storage controller IPv4 addresses and management IPv4 address must be within the same subnet.
4. Type the subnet mask of the management network in the Subnet Mask field.
5. Type the gateway address of the management network in the Gateway IPv4 Address field.
6. Type the domain name of the management network in the Domain Name field.
7. Type the DNS server addresses of the management network in the DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server fields.
8. Click Next.

Set Administrator Information

The Set Administrator Information page allows you to set a new password and an email address for the Admin user.

1. Enter a new password for the default Storage Center administrator user in the New Admin Password and Confirm Password
fields.
2. Enter the email address of the default Storage Center administrator user in the Admin Email Address field.
3. Click Next.
• For a Fibre Channel or SAS storage system, the Confirm Configuration page appears.
• For an iSCSI storage system, the Configure iSCSI Fault Domains page appears.

34 Storage Center Deployment

Configure iSCSI Fault Domains
For a Storage Center with iSCSI front-end ports, use the Configure Fault Tolerance page and the Fault Domain pages to enter
network information for the fault domains and ports.

1. (Optional) On the Configure Fault Tolerance page, click More information about fault domains or How to set up an iSCSI
network to learn more about these topics.
2. Click Next.
NOTE: If any iSCSI ports are down, a dialog box appears that allows you to unconfigure these ports. Unconfiguring
the down iSCSI ports will prevent unnecessary alerts.
3. On the Configure iSCSI HBA Fault Domain 1 page, enter network information for the fault domain and its ports.
NOTE: Make sure that all the IP addresses for iSCSI Fault Domain 1 are in the same subnet.
4. Click Next.
5. On the Configure iSCSI HBA Fault Domain 2 page, enter network information for the fault domain and its ports. Then click
Next.
NOTE: Make sure that all the IP addresses for iSCSI Fault Domain 2 are in the same subnet.

6. Click Next.

Confirm the Storage Center Configuration

Make sure that the configuration information shown on the Confirm Configuration page is correct before continuing.

1. Verify that the Storage Center settings are correct.

For an iSCSI storage system, verify that the iSCSI fault domain settings are correct.
To copy the configuration information to the clipboard so that it can be pasted into a document, click Copy to clipboard.
2. If the configuration information is correct, click Apply Configuration.
If the configuration information is incorrect, click Back and provide the correct information.

NOTE: After you click the Apply Configuration button, the configuration cannot be changed until after the Storage
Center is fully configured.

Initialize the Storage Center

The Storage Center sets up the system using the information provided on the previous pages.

1. The Storage Center performs system setup tasks. The Initialize Storage Center page displays the status of these tasks.
To learn more about the initialization process, click More information about Initialization.
• If one or more of the system setup tasks fails, click Troubleshoot Initialization Error to learn how to resolve the issue.
• If the Configuring Disks task fails, click View Disks to see the status of the disks detected by the Storage Center.
• If any of the Storage Center front-end ports are down, the Storage Center Front-End Ports Down dialog box opens.
Select the ports that are not connected to the storage network, then click OK.
2. When all of the Storage Center setup tasks are complete, click Next.

Configure Time Settings

Configure an NTP server to set the time automatically, or set the time and date manually.

1. From the Region and Time Zone drop-down menus, select the region and time zone used to set the time.
2. Select Use NTP Server and type the host name or IPv4 address of the NTP server, or select Set Current Time and set the
time and date manually.
3. Click Next.

Storage Center Deployment 35

Configure SMTP Server Settings
If you have an SMTP server, configure the SMTP email settings to receive information from the Storage Center about errors,
warnings, and events.

1. By default, the Enable SMTP Email checkbox is selected and enabled. If you do not have an SMTP server you can disable
SMTP email by clearing the Enable SMTP Email checkbox.
2. Alternatively, if you have an SMTP server, configure the SMTP server settings.
a. In the Recipient Email Address field, enter the email address where the information will be sent.
b. In the SMTP Mail Server field, enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the SMTP mail server. Click Test
Server to verify connectivity to the SMTP server.
c. (Optional) In the Backup SMTP Mail Server field, enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of a backup SMTP
mail server. Click Test Server to verify connectivity to the backup SMTP server.
d. If the SMTP server requires emails to contain a MAIL FROM address, specify an email address in the Sender Email
Address field.
e. (Optional) In the Common Subject Line field, enter a subject line to use for all emails sent by the Storage Center.
f. Configure how the Storage Center identifies itself to the SMTP server:
• To use SMTP, type the Storage Center fully qualified domain name in the Hello Message (HELO) field.
• To use ESMTP, select the Send Extended Hello (EHLO) check box, then type the Storage Center fully qualified
domain name in the Extended Hello Message (EHLO) field.
g. If the SMTP server requires clients to authenticate before sending email, select the Use Authorized Login (AUTH LOGIN)
check box, then type a user name and password in the Login ID and Password fields.
3. Click Next.

Review the SupportAssist System State Information Collection and Storage Agreement
The SupportAssist System State Information Collection and Storage page displays the text of the SupportAssist data agreement
and allows you to accept or opt out of using SupportAssist.

1. To allow SupportAssist to collect diagnostic data and send this information to Dell Technical Support, select By checking this
box, you accept the above terms.
2. Click Next.
3. If you did not select By checking this box, you accept the above terms, the SupportAssist Recommended pane opens.
• Click No to return to the SupportAssist Data Collection and Storage page and accept the agreement.
• Click Yes to opt out of using SupportAssist and proceed to the Update Storage Center page.

Provide Contact Information

Enter contact information for technical support to use when sending support-related communications from SupportAssist.

1. Specify the contact information.

2. To receive SupportAssist email messages, select Yes, I would like to receive emails from SupportAssist when issues arise,
including hardware failure notifications.
3. Select the preferred contact method, language, and available times.
4. Type a shipping address where replacement Storage Center components can be sent.
5. Click Next.

Update Storage Center

The Storage Center attempts to contact the SupportAssist Update Server to check for updates. If you are not using SupportAssist,
you must use the Storage Center Update Utility to update the Storage Center operating system before continuing.

• If no update is available, the Storage Center Up to Date page appears. Click Next.
• If an update is available, the current and available Storage Center versions are listed.

a. Click Install to update to the latest version.

b. If the update fails, click Retry Update to try to update again.

36 Storage Center Deployment

 c. When the update is complete, click Next.
• If the SupportAssist Data Collection and Storage Agreement was not accepted, the Storage Center cannot check for updates.

– To proceed without checking for an update, click Next.

– To accept the agreement and check for an update:

a. Click Accept SupportAssist Data Collection and Storage Agreement to review the agreement.
b. Select By checking this box you accept the above terms.
c. Click Next. The Storage Center attempts to contact the SupportAssist Update Server to check for updates.
• The Setup SupportAssist Proxy Settings dialog box appears if the Storage Center cannot connect to the Dell SupportAssist
Update Server. If the site does not have direct access to the Internet but uses a web proxy, configure the proxy settings:

a. Select Enabled.
b. Enter the proxy settings.
c. Click OK. The Storage Center attempts to contact the SupportAssist Update Server to check for updates.

Configure the Storage Center Update Utility

The Storage Center Update Utility is used to update Storage Centers that are not connected to the SupportAssist update server.
Configure Storage Center to use the Storage Center Update Utility if SupportAssist is not enabled.
Prerequisites
SupportAssist must be disabled.
About this task
If Storage Center is unable to check for an update, the Unable to Check for Update page appears.
Steps
1. Click Use Update Utility server and setup configuration.
The Configure Update Utility dialog box appears.
2. In the Update Utility Host or IP Address field, type the host name or IP address of the Storage Center Update Utility.
3. In the Update Utility Port field, type the port of the Storage Center Update Utility.
Storage Center checks for an update on the Storage Center Update Utility then applies the update if necessary.

NOTE: If Storage Center failed to connect to the Update Utility, the Edit Update Utility Configuration dialog box
appears.

Complete Configuration and Perform Next Steps

The Storage Center is now configured. The Configuration Complete page provides links to a Dell Storage Manager Client tutorial
and wizards to perform the next setup tasks.
About this task
NOTE: If the FluidFS license is installed, the deployment wizard will kick off here, before the next steps are shown.

Steps
1. (Optional) Click one of the Next Steps to configure a localhost, configure a VMware host, or create a volume.
When you have completed the step, you are returned to the Configuration Complete page. After you are out of the wizard,
continue to Step 2.
2. Click Finish to exit the wizard.

Related links
Create a Server from the localhost
Create a Server from a VMware vSphere Host
Create a Server from a VMware vCenter Host
Creating Volumes

Storage Center Deployment 37

Configure Embedded iSCSI Ports
Configure the embedded Ethernet ports on the Storage Center for use as iSCSI ports.

1. Configure the fault domain and ports (embedded fault domain 1 or Flex Port Domain 1).
NOTE: The Flex Port feature allows both Storage Center system management traffic and iSCSI traffic to use the
same physical network ports. However, for environments where the Storage Center system management ports are
mixed with network traffic from other devices, separate the iSCSI traffic from management traffic using VLANs.

a. Enter the target IPv4 address, subnet mask, and gateway for the fault domain.
b. Enter an IPv4 address for each port in the fault domain.
NOTE: Make sure that all the IP addresses for the fault domain are in the same subnet.
2. Configure the fault domain and ports (embedded fault domain 2 or Flex Port Domain 2).
a. Enter the target IPv4 address, subnet mask, and gateway for the fault domain.
b. Enter an IPv4 address for each port in the fault domain.
NOTE: Make sure that all the IP addresses for the fault domain are in the same subnet.
3. Click OK.

Discover and Configure Uninitialized SCv2000 Series Storage Centers from the Welcome
Screen (Fibre Channel/SAS)
When setting up the system, use the Discover and Configure Uninitialized SCv2000 Series Storage Centers wizard to find new
Storage Centers. The wizard helps set up a Storage Center to make it ready for volume creation.
Prerequisites
• Client must be running on a system with a 64-bit operating system.
• The Dell Storage Manager Client must be run using Windows Administrator privileges.

Steps
1. Open the Dell Storage Manager Client welcome screen.
2. Click Discover and Configure Uninitialized SCv2000 SeriesStorage Centers.
The Discover and Configure Uninitialized SCv2000 SeriesStorage Centers wizard appears.

Discover and Select an Uninitialized Storage Center

The first page of the Discover and Configure Uninitialized Storage Centers wizard provides a list of prerequisite actions and
information required before setting up a Storage Center.
Prerequisites
• The host server, on which the Storage Manager software is installed, must be on the same subnet or VLAN as the Storage
Center.
• Temporarily disable any firewall on the host server that is running the Storage Manager.
• Layer 2 multicast must be allowed on the network.
• Make sure that IGMP snooping is disabled on the switch ports connected to the Storage Center.

Steps
1. Make sure that you have the required information that is listed on the first page of the wizard. This information is needed to
configure the Storage Center.
2. Click Next. The Select a Storage Center to Initialize page appears and lists the uninitialized Storage Centers discovered by
the wizard.

38 Storage Center Deployment

 NOTE: If the wizard does not discover the Storage Center that you want to initialize, perform one of the following
actions:
• Make sure that the Storage Center hardware is physically attached to all necessary networks.
• Click Rediscover.
• Click Troubleshoot Storage Center Hardware Issue to learn more about reasons why the Storage Center is not
discoverable.
• Click Manually Discover Storage Center via MAC Address to enter the MAC address for the Storage Center.
3. Select the Storage Center to initialize.
4. (Optional) Click Enable Storage Center Indicator to turn on the indicator light for the selected Storage Center. You can use
the indicator to verify that you have selected the correct Storage Center.
5. Click Next.
6. If the Storage Center is partially configured, the Storage Center login pane appears. Enter the management IPv4 address and
the Admin password for the Storage Center, then click Next to continue.

Set System Information

The Set System Information page allows you to enter Storage Center and storage controller configuration information to use when
connecting to the Storage Center using Storage Manager.

1. Type a descriptive name for the Storage Center in the Storage Center Name field.
2. Type the system management IPv4 address for the Storage Center in the Virtual Management IPv4 Address field.
The management IPv4 address is the IP address used to manage the Storage Center and is different from a storage controller
IPv4 address.
3. Type an IPv4 address for the management port of each storage controller.
NOTE: The storage controller IPv4 addresses and management IPv4 address must be within the same subnet.
4. Type the subnet mask of the management network in the Subnet Mask field.
5. Type the gateway address of the management network in the Gateway IPv4 Address field.
6. Type the domain name of the management network in the Domain Name field.
7. Type the DNS server addresses of the management network in the DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server fields.
8. Click Next.

Set Administrator Information

The Set Administrator Information page allows you to set a new password and an email address for the Admin user.

1. Enter a new password for the default Storage Center administrator user in the New Admin Password and Confirm Password
fields.
2. Enter the email address of the default Storage Center administrator user in the Admin Email Address field.
3. Click Next.
• For a Fibre Channel or SAS storage system, the Confirm Configuration page appears.
• For an iSCSI storage system, the Configure iSCSI Fault Domains page appears.

Confirm the Storage Center Configuration

Make sure that the configuration information shown on the Confirm Configuration page is correct before continuing.

1. Verify that the Storage Center settings are correct.

For an iSCSI storage system, verify that the iSCSI fault domain settings are correct.
To copy the configuration information to the clipboard so that it can be pasted into a document, click Copy to clipboard.
2. If the configuration information is correct, click Apply Configuration.
If the configuration information is incorrect, click Back and provide the correct information.

NOTE: After you click the Apply Configuration button, the configuration cannot be changed until after the Storage
Center is fully configured.

Storage Center Deployment 39

Initialize the Storage Center
The Storage Center sets up the system using the information provided on the previous pages.

1. The Storage Center performs system setup tasks. The Initialize Storage Center page displays the status of these tasks.
To learn more about the initialization process, click More information about Initialization.
• If one or more of the system setup tasks fails, click Troubleshoot Initialization Error to learn how to resolve the issue.
• If the Configuring Disks task fails, click View Disks to see the status of the disks detected by the Storage Center.
• If any of the Storage Center front-end ports are down, the Storage Center Front-End Ports Down dialog box opens.
Select the ports that are not connected to the storage network, then click OK.
2. When all of the Storage Center setup tasks are complete, click Next.

Review Redundant Paths

For a Storage Center with Fibre Channel or SAS front-end ports, the Fault Tolerance page displays an example fault domain
topology based on the number of controllers and type of front-end ports. The Review Redundant Paths page displays information
about the fault domains created by the Storage Center.

1. (Optional) On the Fault Tolerance page, click More information about fault domains to learn more about fault domains.
2. Click Next.
NOTE: If there are down SAS or Fibre Channel HBA ports, a dialog box appears that allows you to unconfigure down
ports. Unconfiguring the down SAS or Fibre Channel HBA ports will prevent unnecessary alerts.
3. On the Review Redundant Paths page, make sure that all the information about the fault domains is correct.
4. Click Next.

Configure Time Settings

Configure an NTP server to set the time automatically, or set the time and date manually.

1. From the Region and Time Zone drop-down menus, select the region and time zone used to set the time.
2. Select Use NTP Server and type the host name or IPv4 address of the NTP server, or select Set Current Time and set the
time and date manually.
3. Click Next.

Configure SMTP Server Settings

If you have an SMTP server, configure the SMTP email settings to receive information from the Storage Center about errors,
warnings, and events.

1. By default, the Enable SMTP Email checkbox is selected and enabled. If you do not have an SMTP server you can disable
SMTP email by clearing the Enable SMTP Email checkbox.
2. Alternatively, if you have an SMTP server, configure the SMTP server settings.
a. In the Recipient Email Address field, enter the email address where the information will be sent.
b. In the SMTP Mail Server field, enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the SMTP mail server. Click Test
Server to verify connectivity to the SMTP server.
c. (Optional) In the Backup SMTP Mail Server field, enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of a backup SMTP
mail server. Click Test Server to verify connectivity to the backup SMTP server.
d. If the SMTP server requires emails to contain a MAIL FROM address, specify an email address in the Sender Email
Address field.
e. (Optional) In the Common Subject Line field, enter a subject line to use for all emails sent by the Storage Center.
f. Configure how the Storage Center identifies itself to the SMTP server:
• To use SMTP, type the Storage Center fully qualified domain name in the Hello Message (HELO) field.
• To use ESMTP, select the Send Extended Hello (EHLO) check box, then type the Storage Center fully qualified
domain name in the Extended Hello Message (EHLO) field.
g. If the SMTP server requires clients to authenticate before sending email, select the Use Authorized Login (AUTH LOGIN)
check box, then type a user name and password in the Login ID and Password fields.
3. Click Next.

40 Storage Center Deployment

Review the SupportAssist System State Information Collection and Storage Agreement
The SupportAssist System State Information Collection and Storage page displays the text of the SupportAssist data agreement
and allows you to accept or opt out of using SupportAssist.

1. To allow SupportAssist to collect diagnostic data and send this information to Dell Technical Support, select By checking this
box, you accept the above terms.
2. Click Next.
3. If you did not select By checking this box, you accept the above terms, the SupportAssist Recommended pane opens.
• Click No to return to the SupportAssist Data Collection and Storage page and accept the agreement.
• Click Yes to opt out of using SupportAssist and proceed to the Update Storage Center page.

Provide Contact Information

Enter contact information for technical support to use when sending support-related communications from SupportAssist.

1. Specify the contact information.

2. To receive SupportAssist email messages, select Yes, I would like to receive emails from SupportAssist when issues arise,
including hardware failure notifications.
3. Select the preferred contact method, language, and available times.
4. Type a shipping address where replacement Storage Center components can be sent.
5. Click Next.

Update Storage Center

The Storage Center attempts to contact the SupportAssist Update Server to check for updates. If you are not using SupportAssist,
you must use the Storage Center Update Utility to update the Storage Center operating system before continuing.

• If no update is available, the Storage Center Up to Date page appears. Click Next.
• If an update is available, the current and available Storage Center versions are listed.

a. Click Install to update to the latest version.

b. If the update fails, click Retry Update to try to update again.
c. When the update is complete, click Next.
• If the SupportAssist Data Collection and Storage Agreement was not accepted, the Storage Center cannot check for updates.

– To proceed without checking for an update, click Next.

– To accept the agreement and check for an update:

a. Click Accept SupportAssist Data Collection and Storage Agreement to review the agreement.
b. Select By checking this box you accept the above terms.
c. Click Next. The Storage Center attempts to contact the SupportAssist Update Server to check for updates.
• The Setup SupportAssist Proxy Settings dialog box appears if the Storage Center cannot connect to the Dell SupportAssist
Update Server. If the site does not have direct access to the Internet but uses a web proxy, configure the proxy settings:

a. Select Enabled.
b. Enter the proxy settings.
c. Click OK. The Storage Center attempts to contact the SupportAssist Update Server to check for updates.

Configure the Storage Center Update Utility

The Storage Center Update Utility is used to update Storage Centers that are not connected to the SupportAssist update server.
Configure Storage Center to use the Storage Center Update Utility if SupportAssist is not enabled.
Prerequisites
SupportAssist must be disabled.
About this task
If Storage Center is unable to check for an update, the Unable to Check for Update page appears.

Storage Center Deployment 41

Steps
1. Click Use Update Utility server and setup configuration.
The Configure Update Utility dialog box appears.
2. In the Update Utility Host or IP Address field, type the host name or IP address of the Storage Center Update Utility.
3. In the Update Utility Port field, type the port of the Storage Center Update Utility.
Storage Center checks for an update on the Storage Center Update Utility then applies the update if necessary.

NOTE: If Storage Center failed to connect to the Update Utility, the Edit Update Utility Configuration dialog box
appears.

Complete Configuration and Perform Next Steps

The Storage Center is now configured. The Configuration Complete page provides links to a Dell Storage Manager Client tutorial
and wizards to perform the next setup tasks.
About this task
NOTE: If the FluidFS license is installed, the deployment wizard will kick off here, before the next steps are shown.

Steps
1. (Optional) Click one of the Next Steps to configure a localhost, configure a VMware host, or create a volume.
When you have completed the step, you are returned to the Configuration Complete page. After you are out of the wizard,
continue to Step 2.
2. Click Finish to exit the wizard.

Related links
Create a Server from the localhost
Create a Server from a VMware vSphere Host
Create a Server from a VMware vCenter Host
Creating Volumes

Configure Embedded iSCSI Ports

Configure the embedded Ethernet ports on the Storage Center for use as iSCSI ports.

1. Configure the fault domain and ports (embedded fault domain 1 or Flex Port Domain 1).
NOTE: The Flex Port feature allows both Storage Center system management traffic and iSCSI traffic to use the
same physical network ports. However, for environments where the Storage Center system management ports are
mixed with network traffic from other devices, separate the iSCSI traffic from management traffic using VLANs.

a. Enter the target IPv4 address, subnet mask, and gateway for the fault domain.
b. Enter an IPv4 address for each port in the fault domain.
NOTE: Make sure that all the IP addresses for the fault domain are in the same subnet.
2. Configure the fault domain and ports (embedded fault domain 2 or Flex Port Domain 2).
a. Enter the target IPv4 address, subnet mask, and gateway for the fault domain.
b. Enter an IPv4 address for each port in the fault domain.
NOTE: Make sure that all the IP addresses for the fault domain are in the same subnet.
3. Click OK.

Configuring SC4020, SC8000, and SC9000 Series Storage Centers

Use the Configure Storage Center wizard to set up a new SC4020, SC8000, or SC9000 Series Storage Center. The wizard helps
configure the Storage Center to make it ready for volume creation.
Prerequisites
• The Dell Storage Manager Client must be running on a system with a 64-bit operating system.

42 Storage Center Deployment

• The Dell Storage Manager Client must be run by a Dell Storage Manager Client user with the Administrator privilege.

Steps
1. Open the Dell Storage Manager Client welcome screen.
2. Click Log in to a Storage Center or Data Collector.
3. a. In the User Name field, type the Storage Center user name.
b. In the Password field, type the Storage Center user password.
c. In the Host/IP field, type the host name or IP address of the Storage Center.
d. If you changed the web server port during installation, type the updated port in the Web Server Port field.
4. Click Log In. The Client connects to the Storage Center and indicates that initial configuration is necessary.
5. Click Launch Initial Configuration. The Change Password dialog box opens.
6. Type a new password in the New Password and Confirm Password fields.
7. Click OK. The Configure Storage Center wizard opens.
8. Make sure that you have the required information that is listed on the first page of the wizard. This information is needed to
configure the Storage Center.
9. Click Next. The Submit Storage Center License page opens.

Submit the Storage Center License

Use the Submit Storage Center License page to type the name and title of the approving customer and to select the Storage
Center license file.

1. Type the name and title of the customer who can approve the configuration.
2. Click Browse.
The Select License File window opens.
3. Browse to the location of the license file, select the file, and then click Select.
4. Verify the approving customer information and license file path, then click Next.
The Create Disk Folder page opens.

Create a Disk Folder (Configure Storage Center Wizard)

Create a disk folder to manage unassigned disks.

1. Type a name for the disk folder.

2. (Optional) Place a check next to Create as a Secure Data Folder.
NOTE: This option is available only if all drives support Secure Data.
3. Click Change to open a dialog box for selecting the disks to assign to the folder.
4. Click Next. The Create Storage Type page opens.
5. (Optional) Select the redundancy level from the drop-down menu for each disk tier.
6. (Optional) Select the datapage size from the Datapage Size drop-down menu.
7. Click Next. The Add Controller page opens.

Add a Controller (Configure Storage Center Wizard)

Configure the second controller for systems with two controllers. The Configure Storage Center Wizard automatically adds the
second controller for SC4020 Storage Centers with two controllers. You must manually configure SC8000 and SC9000 Storage
Centers.
About this task

• If the system has only one controller, click Next to proceed to the Set System Information page.
• For SC4020 Storage Centers with two controllers, click Next to add the second controller automatically.
• For SC8000 and SC9000 Storage Centers with two controllers, proceed with the following steps.

Storage Center Deployment 43

Steps
1. Type a serial number for the second controller.
2. Type the IPv4 address and eth1 IPv4 address of the second controller.
3. If the first controller has an IPv6 address set and the Storage Center supports IPv6, type the IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet
prefix of the second controller.
4. Click Next. The Set System Information page opens.

Set System Information (Configure Storage Center Wizard)

Specify system information, such as the system name and management IP address. You can also generate or import an SSL
certificate.

1. In the Storage Center Name field, type a name for the system.
2. In the Management IPv4 Address field, type the management IPv4 address.
3. Import an SSL certificate or generate a new one:
• To import a certificate, select Import a certificate. Click Browse to select a public key and private dey to import.
• To generate a new certificate, select Generate a new self-signed certificate for the Storage Center. Enter IP addresses
and host names for the Storage Center.
NOTE: You must enter the IP address specified in the Management IPv4 Address field.
4. Click Next.
• If the Storage Center is licensed for SEDs, the Key Management Server page opens.
• If the Storage Center is not licensed for SEDs, the Configure Ports page opens.

Enter Key Management Server Settings (Configure Storage Center Wizard)

Specify key management server settings, such as hostname and port.

1. In the Hostname field, type the host name or IP address of the key management server.
2. In the Port field, type the number of a port with open communication with the key management server.
3. In the Timeout field, type the amount of time in seconds after which the Storage Center should stop attempting to reconnect
to the key management server after a failure.
4. To add alternate key management servers, type the host name or IP address of another key management server in the
Alternate Hostnames area, and then click Add.
5. If the key management server requires a user name to validate the Storage Center certificate, enter the name in the Username
field.
6. If the key management server requires a password to validate the Storage Center certificate, enter the password in the
Password field.
7. Configure the key management server certificates:
a. Click Configure Key Management Server Certificates. The Configure Key Management Server Certificates dialog box
appears.
b. Click Browse next to the Root CA Certificate. Navigate to the location of the root CA certificate on your computer and
select it.
c. Click Browse next to the certificate fields for the controllers. Navigate to the location of the controller certificates on your
computer and select them.
d. Click OK.
8. Click Next. The Configure Ports page opens.

Configure Ports (Configure Storage Center Wizard)

Use the Configure Fault Tolerance pages to configure the front-end and back-end ports of the system.

1. Select Configure Fault Domains next to Fibre Channel or iSCSI to set up fault domains for those ports. If the system has both
Fibre Channel and iSCSI ports, select Configure Fault Domains next to both port types.
2. Select Configure Back-End Ports next to SAS (Back-End) to set up SAS ports to connect to the enclosures.

44 Storage Center Deployment

3. Select Configure Fault Domains next to SAS (Front-End) to set up front-end SAS ports to connect directly to hosts.
4. Click Next.

Configure Fibre Channel Ports (Configure Storage Center Wizard)

Create a Fibre Channel fault domain to group FC ports for failover purposes.

1. On the first Configure Fibre Channel Fault Tolerance page, select a transport mode: Virtual Port or Legacy.
2. Select the method for creating fault domains:
• Generate Fault Domain Configuration – One of the following fault domains is created, depending on system configuration
and mode selected:

Transport Mode One Controller Two Controllers

Virtual Port Two controller ports Two controller ports, one on each controller
Legacy One controller port Four controller ports, two on each controller
• Specify Number of Fault Domains – Set the number of fault domains to create.
3. Click Next.
NOTE: If you selected Generate Fault Domain Configuration, proceed to step 5.
4. If you selected Specify Number of Fault Domains, configure each fault domain.
a. In the Name field, type a name for the fault domain.
b. (Optional) In the Notes field, type notes for the fault domain.
c. In the Ports table, select the Fibre Channel ports to add to the fault domain. All FC ports in the fault domain should be
connected to the same FC fabric.
d. Click Next. If you are configuring more than one fault domain, repeat these steps for each domain.
5. On the final Configure Fibre Channel Fault Tolerance page, review the fault domain setup.
6. (Optional) To change the fault domain setup, select from the following options:
• Click Create Fault Domain to create a new fault domain.
• Click Edit Fault Domain to edit the current fault domain.
• Click Remove to delete a fault domain.
7. Click Next.
• If you are setting up iSCSI fault domains, the Configure iSCSI Fault Domain page opens.
• If you are setting up SAS back-end ports but not iSCSI fault domains, the Configure Back-End Ports page opens.
• If you are not setting up iSCSI fault domains or SAS back-end ports, the Time Settings page opens.

Configure iSCSI Ports (Configure Storage Center Wizard)

Create an iSCSI fault domain to group ports for failover purposes.

1. On the first Configure iSCSI Fault Tolerance page, select the number of fault domains to create, and then click Next.
2. On the next Configure iSCSI Fault Tolerance page, configure the first fault domain:
a. In the Name field, type a name for the fault domain.
b. (Optional) In the Notes field, type notes for the fault domain.
c. In the Target IPv4 Address field, type an IP address to assign to the iSCSI control port.
d. In the Subnet Mask field, type the subnet mask for the IP address.
e. In the Gateway IPv4 Address field, type the IP address for the iSCSI network default gateway.
f. In the Ports table, select the iSCSI ports to add to the fault domain. All iSCSI ports in the fault domain should be connected
to the same Ethernet network.
g. Click Next. If you are configuring more than one fault domain, repeat these steps for each fault domain.
3. On the final Configure iSCSI Fault Tolerance page, review the fault domain setup.
4. (Optional) To change the fault domain setup, select from the following options:
• Click Create Fault Domain to create a new fault domain.
• Click Edit Fault Domain to edit the current fault domain.
• Click Remove to delete a fault domain.

Storage Center Deployment 45

5. Click Next.
• If you are setting up SAS back-end ports, the Configure Back-End Ports page opens.
• If you are not setting up SAS back-end ports, the Time Settings page opens.

Configure Back-End Ports (Configure Storage Center Wizard)

Select SAS ports to configure for connecting to enclosures.

1. On the Configure Back-End Ports page, select the SAS ports to configure.
2. Click Next. The Time Settings page opens.

Inherit Settings (Configure Storage Center Wizard)

Use the Inherit Settings page to copy settings from a Storage Center that is already configured.

1. Select the Storage Center whose settings you want to copy.

2. Place a check next to each setting that you want to inherit, or click Select All to inherit all settings.
3. Click Next.
• If you chose to inherit time and SMTP settings from another Storage Center, the Configure Storage Center Wizard skips
those pages and the SupportAssist System State Information Collection and Storage page is displayed.
• If you did not choose to inherit time and SMTP settings, the Time Settings and SMTP Server Settings pages are
displayed.

Configure Time Settings

Configure an NTP server to set the time automatically, or set the time and date manually.

1. From the Region and Time Zone drop-down menus, select the region and time zone used to set the time.
2. Select Use NTP Server and type the host name or IPv4 address of the NTP server, or select Set Current Time and set the
time and date manually.
3. Click Next.

Configure SMTP Server Settings

If you have an SMTP server, configure the SMTP email settings to receive information from the Storage Center about errors,
warnings, and events.

1. By default, the Enable SMTP Email checkbox is selected and enabled. If you do not have an SMTP server you can disable
SMTP email by clearing the Enable SMTP Email checkbox.
2. Alternatively, if you have an SMTP server, configure the SMTP server settings.
a. In the Recipient Email Address field, enter the email address where the information will be sent.
b. In the SMTP Mail Server field, enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the SMTP mail server. Click Test
Server to verify connectivity to the SMTP server.
c. (Optional) In the Backup SMTP Mail Server field, enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of a backup SMTP
mail server. Click Test Server to verify connectivity to the backup SMTP server.
d. If the SMTP server requires emails to contain a MAIL FROM address, specify an email address in the Sender Email
Address field.
e. (Optional) In the Common Subject Line field, enter a subject line to use for all emails sent by the Storage Center.
f. Configure how the Storage Center identifies itself to the SMTP server:
• To use SMTP, type the Storage Center fully qualified domain name in the Hello Message (HELO) field.
• To use ESMTP, select the Send Extended Hello (EHLO) check box, then type the Storage Center fully qualified
domain name in the Extended Hello Message (EHLO) field.
g. If the SMTP server requires clients to authenticate before sending email, select the Use Authorized Login (AUTH LOGIN)
check box, then type a user name and password in the Login ID and Password fields.
3. Click Next.

46 Storage Center Deployment

Review the SupportAssist System State Information Collection and Storage Agreement
The SupportAssist System State Information Collection and Storage page displays the text of the SupportAssist data agreement
and allows you to accept or opt out of using SupportAssist.

1. To allow SupportAssist to collect diagnostic data and send this information to Dell Technical Support, select By checking this
box, you accept the above terms.
2. Click Next.
3. If you did not select By checking this box, you accept the above terms, the SupportAssist Recommended pane opens.
• Click No to return to the SupportAssist Data Collection and Storage page and accept the agreement.
• Click Yes to opt out of using SupportAssist and proceed to the Update Storage Center page.

Provide Contact Information

Enter contact information for technical support to use when sending support-related communications from SupportAssist.

1. Specify the contact information.

2. To receive SupportAssist email messages, select Yes, I would like to receive emails from SupportAssist when issues arise,
including hardware failure notifications.
3. Select the preferred contact method, language, and available times.
4. Type a shipping address where replacement Storage Center components can be sent.
5. Click Next.

Set Up a localhost or VMware Host

After configuring a Storage Center, you can set up block-level storage for a localhost, VMware vSphere host, or VMware vCenter.

Set Up a localhost from Initial Setup

Configure a localhost to access block-level storage on the Storage Center. It is recommended that you perform this procedure for
each host that is connected to the Storage Center.
Prerequisites
• Client must be running on a system with a 64-bit operating system.
• The Dell Storage Manager Client must be run by a Dell Storage Manager Client user with the Administrator privilege.
• The Storage Center must be added to Storage Manager using a Storage Center user with the Administrator or Volume Manager
privilege.
• On a Storage Center with Fibre Channel IO ports, configure the Fibre Channel zoning before starting this procedure.
• To configure a host to access block-level storage on a Storage Center with SAS HBAs, you must connect to the Storage Center
through a Dell Storage Manager Data Collector.

Steps
1. On the Configuration Complete page of the Discover and Configure Storage Center wizard, click Configure this host to
access a Storage Center.
The Set up localhost on Storage Center wizard appears.
2. Click Next.
• If the Storage Center has iSCSI ports and the host is not connected to an iSCSI interface, the Log into Storage Center via
iSCSI page appears. Select the target fault domains, and then click Next.
• In all other cases, the Verify localhost Information page appears.
3. Select an available port, and then click Next. The server definition is created on the Storage Center.
The Host Setup Successful page displays the best practices that were set by the wizard and best practices that were not set.
Make a note of any best practices that were not set. It is recommended that these updates be applied manually before starting
I/O to the Storage Center.
4. (Optional) To create a volume after finishing host setup, select the Launch wizard to create a volume for this host checkbox.

Storage Center Deployment 47

5. Click Finish.

Set Up a VMware Host from Initial Setup

Configure a VMware vSphere host to access block-level storage on the Storage Center.
Prerequisites
• Client must be running on a system with a 64-bit operating system.
• The Dell Storage Manager Client must be run by a Dell Storage Manager Client user with the Administrator privilege.
• The Storage Center must be added to Storage Manager using a Storage Center user with the Administrator or Volume Manager
privilege.
• On a Storage Center with Fibre Channel IO ports, configure the Fibre Channel zoning before starting this procedure.
• To configure a host to access block-level storage on a Storage Center with SAS HBAs, you must connect to the Storage Center
through a Dell Storage Manager Data Collector.
• To download the correct SAS HBA driver for an ESXi host, go to www.vmware.com/resources/compatibility and search for
Dell mpt3sas 04.00.00.00.1. Click the Dell 12GB/s HBA external link, and download the mpt3sas version
04.00.00.00.1vmw driver.
• To update the SAS HBA driver on an ESXi host, see www.dell.com/Support/Article/us/en/19/HOW11081.
• Configure only one ESXi host at a time.

Steps
1. On the Configuration Complete page of the Discover and Configure Storage Center wizard, click Configure VMware
vSphere to access a Storage Center.
The Set up VMware Host on Storage Center wizard appears.
2. Enter the IP address or host name, the user name, and password of the VMware host.
3. Click Next.
• If the Storage Center has iSCSI ports and the host is not connected to any interface, the Log into Storage Center via
iSCSI page appears. Select the target fault domains, and then click Log In.
• In all other cases, the Verify vCenter Information page appears.
4. Select an available port, and then click Next. The server definition is created on the Storage Center.
The Host Setup Successful page displays the best practices that were set by the wizard and best practices that were not set.
Make a note of any best practices that were not set by the wizard. It is recommended that these updates be applied manually
before starting I/O to the Storage Center.
5. (Optional) To create a volume after finishing host setup, select the Launch wizard to create a volume for this host checkbox.
6. Click Finish.

Set Up a VMware vCenter Host from Initial Setup

Configure a VMware vCenter host to access block-level storage on the Storage Center.
Prerequisites
• Client must be running on a system with a 64-bit operating system.
• The Dell Storage Manager Client must be run by a Dell Storage Manager Client user with the Administrator privilege.
• The Storage Center must be added to Storage Manager using a Storage Center user with the Administrator or Volume Manager
privilege.
• On a Storage Center with Fibre Channel IO ports, configure the Fibre Channel zoning before starting this procedure.
• To configure a host to access block-level storage on a Storage Center with SAS HBAs, you must connect to the Storage Center
through a Dell Storage Manager Data Collector.
• To download the correct SAS HBA driver for an ESXi host, go to www.vmware.com/resources/compatibility and search for
Dell mpt3sas 04.00.00.00.1. Click the Dell 12GB/s HBA external link, and download the mpt3sas version
04.00.00.00.1vmw driver.
• To update the SAS HBA driver on an ESXi host, see www.dell.com/Support/Article/us/en/19/HOW11081.
• Configure only one ESXi host or server object at a time.

48 Storage Center Deployment

Steps
1. On the Configuration Complete page of the Discover and Configure Storage Center wizard, click Configure VMware
vSphere to access a Storage Center.
The Set up VMware Host on Storage Center wizard appears.
2. Enter the IP address or host name, the user name, and password of the vCenter Server.
3. Click Next.
The Verify vCenter Information page appears and displays the VMware hosts that are connected or partially connected.
4. Click Next.
5. Enter the IP address or host name, the user name, and password of a VMware host.
6. Select an available port, and then click Next. The server definition is created on the Storage Center.
The Host Setup Successful page displays the best practices that were set by the wizard and best practices that were not set.
Make a note of any best practices that were not set by the wizard. It is recommended that these updates be applied manually
before starting I/O to the Storage Center.
7. (Optional) To create a volume after finishing host setup, select the Launch wizard to create a volume for this host checkbox.
8. Click Finish.

Storage Center Deployment 49

50
 4
Storage Center Administration
Storage Center provides centralized, block-level storage that can be accessed by Fibre Channel, iSCSI, or SAS.

Storage Center User Privileges and User Groups

Storage Center groups determine which storage objects can be viewed by the Storage Center user, and the privilege level defines
what the user can do.
NOTE: Storage Center user privileges and Storage Manager user privileges share the same names, but they are not the
same. Storage Center user privileges control access to Storage Center functionality, and Storage Manager user
privileges control access to Storage Manager functionality. A user may have a different role in Storage Manager than in
Storage Center. This role difference affects small details of that user’s access.

Managing Volumes
A Storage Center volume is a logical unit of storage that servers can access over a network. You can allocate more logical space to
a volume than is physically available on the Storage Center.

Attributes That Determine Volume Behavior

When a volume is created, attributes are associated with the volume to control its behavior.

Attribute Description
Storage Type Specifies the disk folder, tier redundancy, and data page size of
the storage used by the volume.

Storage Profile Controls the RAID type, storage tiers, and data progression
behavior for pages used by the volume.

Snapshot Profile Describes when to take periodic snapshots (also known as

point-in-time copies) for one or more volumes and the time at
which snapshots are deleted (expired).

QoS Profile Specifies a profile to apply to volumes, to potentially limit I/Os

that the volumes can perform, and also defines their relative
priority during times of congestion.

Related links
Attributes That Determine Volume Behavior
Managing Storage Profiles
Managing Snapshot Profiles

Volume Icons
The following table describes the volume icons that appear in the Storage tab navigation pane.

Icon Description
The volume is not mapped to any servers.

The volume is mapped to one or more servers.

Storage Center Administration 51

Icon Description
The volume is the source for a replication to a remote Storage Center.

NOTE: This icon is also displayed for volumes that have been configured to Copy, Mirror, or Migrate in
the Storage Center Manager. These operations are not available in the Dell Storage Manager Client.

The volume is the destination for a replication from a remote Storage Center.

The volume is currently the primary or secondary volume in a Live Volume.

The volume is the source or destination of Live Migration.

The volume was created from a Secure Data Storage Type.

Creating Volumes
Create volumes to present servers a logical unit of storage on a Storage Center.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Create a Volume Using Single-Step Dialog

If you need a small number of volumes, you can create them one at a time.
Prerequisites
The options for Volume QoS Profile and Group QoS Profile appear on the dialog box only if Allow QoS Profile Selection has been
selected on the Storage Center Preferences.
Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select Volumes.
3. In the right pane, click Create Volume. The Create Volume dialog box appears.
4. In the Name field, type a name for the volume.
5. In the Size field, type a size for the volume in kilobytes (KB), megabytes (MB), gigabytes (GB), or terabytes (TB).
6. In the Volume Folder pane, select the parent folder for the volume.
7. (Optional) Configure the remaining volume attributes as needed.
• To schedule snapshot creation and expiration for the volume, apply one or more Snapshot Profiles by clicking Change
across from Snapshot Profiles.
• To map the volume to a server, click Change across from Server.
• If Chargeback is enabled, select the department to charge for storage costs associated with the volume by clicking Change
across from Chargeback Department.
• If Data Reduction is enabled on the Storage Center, select Compression or Deduplication with Compression to enable
Data Reduction on the volume.
• To use specific disk tiers and RAID levels for volume data, select the appropriate Storage Profile from the Storage Profile
drop-down menu. Using the Recommended Storage Profile allows the volume to take full advantage of data progression.
• If more than one Storage Type is defined on the Storage Center, select the Storage Type to provide storage from the
Storage Type drop-down menu.
• To set a Volume QoS Profile, either accept the default QoS Profile or click Change across from Volume QoS Profile. Then
select a Volume QoS profile from the resulting list, and click OK.
• To set a Group QoS Profile, click Change across from Group QoS Profile. Then select a Group QoS profile from the
resulting list, and click OK.
• To adjust the Read/Write Cache, enter the desired size of the cache.
8. Click OK.

52 Storage Center Administration

Create a Volume Using the Multiple-step Wizard
The multiple-step wizard is the default method of creating volumes for SCv2000 series controllers .

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select Volumes.
3. In the right pane, click Create Volume.
The Create Volume wizard appears.
4. In the Volume Identification page, specify the name, notes, and folder for the volume being created.
a. In the name field, type the desired name of the volume.
b. (Optional) In the notes field, type any notes associated with the volume.
c. In the volume folder pane, specify the desired location of the volume.
d. (Optional) To create a new folder, click Create Folder.
The Create Volume Folder dialog box appears.
5. Click Next.
The Specify Capacity page appears.
6. In the size field, type the desired size of the volume.
7. Click Next.
(Optional) The Storage Options page appears. If no options are available, the wizard will not display this page.
8. In the Storage Options page, specify the Storage Type, Storage Profile, QoS Profiles, Data Reduction Profile, and Disk Folder
for the volume.
NOTE: Storage options vary based on the features the Storage Center supports.
9. Click Next.
The Set Snapshot Profiles page appears.
10. Select a Snapshot Profile.
• (Optional) To create a new Snapshot Profile, click Create New Snapshot Profile.
11. Click Next.
The Map to Server page appears.
12. Select a server. Click Create Server to create a new server and map it to the new volume. You can also create the volume
without mapping a server if you choose. To select this option, click Yes to the No Server Specified dialog. To select from a
more detailed list of options, click Advanced Mapping.
13. Click Next.
The Volume Summary page appears.
14. Click Finish.

Create Multiple Volumes Simultaneously Using Single-Step Dialog

If you need to create many volumes, you can streamline the process by creating multiple volumes at a time.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select Volumes.
3. In the right pane, click Create Multiple Volumes. The Create Volume dialog box appears.
4. Use the Create Volume dialog box to configure the base volume parameters.
a. In the Volume Count field, type the number of volumes to create.
b. In the Base Volume Name field, type a base name for the volumes. Each volume is named with a combination of the base
name and the volume number.
c. In the Size field, type a size for the volumes in kilobytes (KB), megabytes (MB), gigabytes (GB), or terabytes (TB).
d. In the Volume Folder pane, select the parent folder for the volumes.
e. In the Notes field, type any notes you want to associate with these volumes.
f. (Optional) Configure the remaining volume attributes as needed.

Storage Center Administration 53

 • To schedule snapshot creation and expiration for the volume, apply one or more Snapshot Profiles by clicking Change
across from Snapshot Profiles.
• To map the volume to a server, click Change across from Server.
• If Chargeback is enabled, select the department to charge for storage costs associated with the volume by clicking
Change across from Chargeback Department.
• If Data Reduction is enabled on the Storage Center, select Compression or Deduplication with Compression to enable
Data Reduction on the volume.
• To use specific disk tiers and RAID levels for volume data, select the appropriate Storage Profile from the Storage
Profile drop-down menu. Using the Recommended Storage Profile allows the volume to take full advantage of data
progression.
• If more than one Storage Type is defined on the Storage Center, select the Storage Type to provide storage from the
Storage Type drop-down menu.
• To set a Volume QoS Profile, either accept the default QoS Profile or click Change across from Volume QoS Profile.
Then select a Volume QoS profile from the resulting list, and click OK.
• To set a Group QoS Profile, click Change across from Group QoS Profile. Then select a Group QoS profile from the
resulting list, and click OK.
• To adjust the Read/Write Cache, enter the desired size of the cache.
g. Click OK. The Create Multiple Volumes dialog box appears and displays the volume you created in the previous step.
5. Use the Create Multiple Volumes dialog box to create additional volumes.
• To add a volume based on a previous volume, select the volume from the list, then click Clone Selected Volume.
• To manually define another volume, click Add Volume.
• To modify an individual volume, select the volume from the list, then click Edit Volume.
• To remove an individual volume, select the volume from the list, then click Remove Volume.
6. When you are finished, click OK.

Create Multiple Volumes Simultaneously Using the Multiple-step Wizard

If you need to create many volumes, you can streamline the process by creating multiple volumes at a time. The multiple-step
wizard is the default way to create volumes for the SCv2000 series controllers, and the only method available for direct connect
SCv2000 series controllers to create multiple volumes simultaneously.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select Volumes.
3. In the right pane, click Create Multiple Volumes.
The Create Multiple Volumes wizard appears.
4. In the Volume Identification page, specify the number of volumes to create, a base name, and notes, and select a folder for
the volumes.
a. In the volume count field, type the number of volumes.
b. In the base volume name field, type the base name for the volumes. Each volume is named with a combination of the base
name and the volume number.
c. (Optional) In the notes field, type any notes associated with the volumes.
d. In the volume folder pane, specify the desired location of the volumes. All volumes created will by default be placed in this
folder. You can change this setting in the summary page before the wizard actually creates the volumes.
e. (Optional) To create a new folder, click Create New Folder.
The Create Volume Folder dialog box appears.
5. Click Next.
The Specify Capacity page appears.
6. In the size field, type the desired size of the volumes in bytes, kilobytes (KB), gigabytes (GB), or terabytes (TB).
7. Click Next.
The Storage Options pane appears.
8. In the Storage Options page, specify the storage options for the volumes.
• To schedule snapshot creation and expiration for the volume, apply one or more Snapshot Profiles by clicking Change
across from Snapshot Profiles.

54 Storage Center Administration

 • To map the volume to a server, click Change across from Server.
• If Chargeback is enabled, select the department to charge for storage costs associated with the volume by clicking Change
across from Chargeback Department.
• If Data Reduction is enabled on the Storage Center, select Compression or Deduplication with Compression to enable
Data Reduction on the volume.
• To use specific disk tiers and RAID levels for volume data, select the appropriate Storage Profile from the Storage Profile
drop-down menu. Using the Recommended Storage Profile allows the volume to take full advantage of data progression.
• If more than one Storage Type is defined on the Storage Center, select the Storage Type to provide storage from the
Storage Type drop-down menu.
• To set a Volume QoS Profile, either accept the default QoS Profile or click Change across from Volume QoS Profile. Then
select a Volume QoS profile from the resulting list, and click OK.
• To set a Group QoS Profile, click Change across from Group QoS Profile. Then select a Group QoS profile from the
resulting list, and click OK.
• To adjust the Read/Write Cache, enter the desired size of the cache.

NOTE: The storage options vary based on the features the Storage Center supports.
9. Click Next.
The Set Snapshot Profiles page appears.
10. Select a Snapshot Profile.
• (Optional) To create a new Snapshot Profile, click Create New Snapshot Profile.
11. Click Next.
The Map to Server page appears.
12. Select a server. For more detailed options, click Advanced Mapping. To create a volume without selecting a server, click Yes to
the No Server Specified dialog. To create a new server, click New Server.
13. Click Next.
The Volume Summary pane appears.
14. Review the table of new volume settings.
• To manually define another volume, click Add Volume.
• To modify a previous volume, select the volume from the list, then click Edit Volume.
• To add a volume based on a previous volume, select the volume from the list, then click Clone Volume.
• To remove a previous volume, select the volume from the list, then click Remove Volume.
15. When you are finished, click Finish.

Modifying Volumes
You can rename, move, or expand a volume after it has been created. You can also modify advanced volume attributes if needed.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Rename a Volume
A volume can be renamed without affecting its availability.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume you want to modify.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Volume dialog box opens.
4. In the Name field, type a new name for the volume.
5. When you are finished, click OK.

Storage Center Administration 55

Move a Volume to a Different Volume Folder
Volumes can be organized by placing them in folders.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume you want to modify.
3. In the right pane, click Move to Folder. The Move to Folder dialog box opens.
4. In the navigation pane, select a new parent volume folder.
5. When you are finished, click OK.

Move Multiple Volumes to a Different Volume Folder

Right-click a selection of volumes to move them to a different folder.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Volumes node or the volume folder that contains the volumes.
3. In the right pane, select the volumes that you want to move.
• To select contiguous volumes, select the first volume, then hold down Shift and select the last volume.
• To select individual volumes, hold down Control while selecting them.
4. Right-click one of the selected volumes, then select Move to Folder. The Move to Folder dialog box opens.
5. In the navigation pane, select a new parent volume folder.
6. When you are finished, click OK.

Expand a Volume
Expand the size of a volume if more space is needed.
About this task
NOTE: Fluid Cache volumes cannot be expanded.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume you want to expand.
3. In the right pane, click Expand Volume. The Expand Volume dialog box opens.
4. Type a new size for the volume, then click OK.

Enable or Disable Read/Write Caching for a Volume

Read and write caching generally improves performance. To improve performance, disable write caching on volumes that use SSD
storage.
About this task
NOTE: Read cache and write cache cannot be enabled for Fluid Cache volumes.

Steps
1. Make sure Allow Cache Selection is enabled for volumes in the Storage Center user preferences.
a. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
b. Click the Preferences tab.
c. Make sure the Allow Cache Selection check box is selected.
d. Click OK.
2. Click the Storage tab.
3. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume you want to modify.
4. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Volume dialog box opens.
5. Enable or disable the cache options as needed. These options are described in the online help.
• Select or clear the Read Cache check box.

56 Storage Center Administration

 For volumes using SSD storage, test applications before enabling or disabling read cache.
• Select or clear the Write Cache check box.
To improve performance, disable write caching on volumes that use SSD storage for most applications.
6. When you are finished, click OK.

Assign Snapshot Profiles to a Volume

Assign one or more Snapshot Profiles to a volume if you want snapshots to be created on an automated schedule.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume you want to modify.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Volume dialog box opens.
4. Select the appropriate Snapshot Profiles.
a. Next to Snapshot Profiles, click Change. The Select Snapshot Profiles dialog box opens.
b. In the top pane of the dialog box, select the Snapshot Profiles to assign to the volume.
c. When you are finished, click OK. The Select Snapshot Profiles dialog box closes.
5. Click OK to close the Edit Volume dialog box.

Assign Snapshot Profiles to Multiple Volumes

Snapshot Profiles can be assigned to multiple volumes in one operation.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume you want to modify.
3. In the right pane, select the volumes that you want to modify.
• To select contiguous volumes, select the first volume, then hold down Shift and select the last volume.
• To select individual volumes, hold down Control while selecting them.
4. Right-click the selection, then select Set Snapshot Profiles. The Set Snapshot Profiles dialog box opens.
5. In the upper table, select the check box for each Snapshot Profile you want to assign to the volume.
6. To remove the Snapshot Profiles that were previously assigned to the volume, select the Replace Existing Snapshot Profiles
check box.
7. When you are finished, click OK.

Assign a Different Storage Profile to a Volume

The Storage Profile determines the RAID type and storage tiers used by the volume.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume you want to modify.
3. In the right pane, click Storage Profile. The Set Storage Profile dialog box opens.
4. From the Storage Profile drop-down menu, select a Storage Profile.
5. When you are finished, click OK.

Assign a Different Storage Profile to Multiple Volumes

The Storage Profile determines the RAID type and storage tiers used by the volume. A Storage Profile can be assigned to multiple
volumes in one operation.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Volumes node or the volume folder that contains the volumes.
3. In the right pane, select the volumes that you want to modify.
• To select contiguous volumes, select the first volume, then hold down Shift and select the last volume.
• To select individual volumes, hold down Control while selecting them.
4. Right-click the selection, then select Set Storage Profile. The Set Storage Profile dialog box opens.
5. From the Storage Profile drop-down menu, select a Storage Profile.

Storage Center Administration 57

6. When you are finished, click OK.

Force Writes to the Lowest Storage Tier for a Volume

The Import to lowest tier option forces all data written to the volume to the lowest storage tier configured for the volume. Enabling
this option decreases performance for the volume.
Prerequisites
The volume must use a Standard storage type. The Import to lowest tier option is not available for Flash-Optimized storage types.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume you want to modify.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Volume dialog box appears.
4. Click Edit Advanced Volume Settings. The Edit Advanced Volume Settings dialog box appears.
5. Select the Import to lowest tier check box.
6. Click OK to close the Edit Advanced Volume Settings dialog box, then click OK to close the Edit Volume dialog box.

Associate a Chargeback Department with a Volume

If Chargeback is enabled, you can assign a Chargeback Department to the volume to make sure the department is charged for the
storage used by the volume.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume you want to modify.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Volume dialog box appears.
4. Next to Chargeback Department, click Change. The Add Chargeback Department dialog box appears.
5. Select the appropriate department, then click OK.
6. Click OK to close the Edit Volume dialog box.

Configure a Space Consumption Limit for a Volume

Set a space consumption limit to specify the maximum space that can be used on the volume.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume you want to modify.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Volume dialog box appears.
4. Click Edit Advanced Volume Settings. The Edit Advanced Volume Settings dialog box appears.
5. Configure the Space Consumption Limit options.
a. Select Enabled.
b. In the field, type the maximum space that can be used on the volume in kilobytes (KB), megabytes (MB), gigabytes (GB),
or terabytes (TB).
6. Click OK to close the Edit Advanced Volume Settings dialog box, then click OK to close the Edit Volume dialog box.

Configure an OpenVMS Unique Disk ID for a Volume

Configure an OpenVMS Unique Disk ID to identify the volume to servers running the OpenVMS operating system. You may need to
reset this value when recovering a volume from a snapshot. For example, if you map a volume to a server, create a snapshot, and
then mount a new view volume to the server, the new view volume has a new disk ID. To allow the server to recognize it as the
same volume, you must modify the disk ID to match the original value.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume you want to modify.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Volume dialog box appears.
4. Click Edit Advanced Volume Settings. The Edit Advanced Volume Settings dialog box appears.
5. In the OpenVMS Unique Disk ID field, type a new disk ID.
6. Click OK to close the Edit Advanced Volume Settings dialog box, then click OK to close the Edit Volume dialog box.

58 Storage Center Administration

Configure Related View Volume Maximums for a Volume
For a given volume, you can configure the maximum number of view volumes, including the original volume, that can be created for
volumes that share the same snapshot. You can also configure the maximum combined size for these volumes.
Prerequisites
Consult with Dell Technical Support before changing these limits.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume you want to modify.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Volume dialog box appears.
4. Click Edit Advanced Volume Settings. The Edit Advanced Volume Settings dialog box appears.
5. In the Maximum Volume Count field, type the maximum number of view volumes, including the original volume, that can be
created for volumes that share the same snapshot history as this volume.
6. In the Maximum Configured Volume Space, type the maximum combined size for all view volumes, including the original
volume, that share the same snapshot history as this volume in kilobytes (KB), megabytes (MB), gigabytes (GB), or terabytes
(TB). To disable this limit, select the Unlimited check box.
7. Click OK to close the Edit Advanced Volume Settings dialog box, then click OK to close the Edit Volume dialog box.

Copying Volumes
Copy a volume to create an identical volume for back-up or reuse of the data.
The destination volume of a copy, mirror, or migrate must meet the following requirements:

• Must not be mapped to a server.

• Must be the same size or larger than the source volume.
• Cannot be active on another controller.

Copy a Volume
Copying a volume copies the data from a source volume to a destination volume. Changes made to the source volume during the
copy process are also made to the destination volume.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select a volume.
3. In the right pane, select Local Copy → Copy Volume. The Copy Volume dialog box opens.
4. Select an existing volume or create a new volume for the destination volume.
• To select an existing volume, select a volume from the Destination Volume table.
• To create a new volume for the destination volume, click Create Volume.
5. (Optional) Select Copy Snapshots.
6. From the Priority drop-down menu, select a priority level for the copy operation.
7. (Optional) Select Schedule Start Time to set a time for the copy to be created.
8. Click OK.

Related links
Create a Volume Using Single-Step Dialog
Creating Volumes

Create a Mirroring Volume

A mirroring volume is a copy of a volume that also dynamically changes to match the source volume. The source and destination
volumes are continuously synchronized.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select a volume.

Storage Center Administration 59

3. In the right pane, select Local Copy → Mirror Volume. The Mirror Volume dialog box opens.
4. Select an existing volume or create a new volume for the destination volume.
• To select an existing volume, select a volume from the Destination Volume table.
• To create a new volume for the destination volume, click Create Volume.
5. (Optional) Select Copy Snapshots.
6. From the Priority drop-down menu, select a priority level for the copy operation.
7. (Optional) Select Schedule Start Time to set a time for the copy to be created.
8. Click OK.

Related links
Create a Volume Using Single-Step Dialog
Creating Volumes

Migrate a Volume
Migrating a volume copies a source volume with its server to volume mappings to a destination volume. After migrating the volume,
the destination volume is mapped to all servers previously mapped to the source volume.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select a volume.
3. In the right pane, select Local Copy → Migrate Volume. The Migrate Volume dialog box opens.
4. Select an existing volume or create a new volume for the destination volume.
• To select an existing volume, select a volume from the Destination Volume table.
• To create a new volume for the destination volume, click Create Volume.
5. (Optional) Click Copy Snapshots to also copy the snapshots from the source volume.
6. From the Priority drop-down menu, select a priority level for the copy operation.
7. (Optional) Select a post-migrate action.
• Do Nothing – Migrates the volume without any post-migration actions
• Delete Source – Deletes the source volume after migrating
• Reverse Mirror – Mirrors the destination volume to the source volume
8. (Optional) Select Schedule Start Time to set a time for the copy to be created.
9. Click OK.

Related links
Create a Volume Using Single-Step Dialog
Creating Volumes

View Copy/Mirror/Migrate Information

The Summary tab for a volume in a copy, mirror, or migrate relationship displays information for any copy, mirror, or migrate
relationship involving the selected volume. Copy and migrate information appears in the Summary tab only during the copy or
migrate operation.
Prerequisites
The volume must be in a copy, mirror, migrate relationship.
Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select a volume.
The Copy/Mirror/Migrate area in the Volume Summary tab displays information for any copy, mirror, or migrate relationship
involving the selected volume.

60 Storage Center Administration

Delete a Copy, Mirror or Migrate Relationship
Delete a copy, mirror, or migrate relationship to prevent the source volume from copying to the destination volume. Deleting a
relationship deletes the relationship from the source and destination volumes.
Prerequisites
The volume must be involved in a copy, mirror, or migrate relationship.
Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select a volume.
3. From the Copy/Mirror/Migrate table, select a copy, mirror, or migrate relationship.
4. Click Delete Copy/Mirror/Migrate.
The Delete confirmation dialog box appears.
5. Click OK.

Creating and Managing Volume Folders

Use volume folders to organize volumes or to restrict access to volumes.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Create a Volume Folder

Create a volume folder either to organize volumes or to restrict access to volumes.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select Volumes.
3. In the right pane, click Create Volume Folder. The Create Volume Folder dialog box opens.
4. In the Name field, type a name for the folder.
5. In the Parent field, select a parent folder.
6. When you are finished, click OK.

Rename a Volume Folder

Use the Edit Settings dialog box to rename a volume folder.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume folder you want to rename.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. In the Name field, type a new name for the volume folder.
5. Click OK.

Move a Volume Folder

Use the Edit Settings dialog box to move a volume folder. Folders can be nested in other folders.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume folder you want to move.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. In the Parent field, select the appropriate parent folder.
5. Click OK.

Storage Center Administration 61

Associate a Chargeback Department with a Volume Folder
If Chargeback is enabled, you can assign a Chargeback Department to a folder to make sure the department is charged for the
storage used by all volumes in the folder.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume folder you want to modify.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box appears.
4. Next to Chargeback Department, click Change. The Add Chargeback Department dialog box appears.
5. Select the appropriate department, then click OK.
6. Click OK to close the Edit Settings dialog box.

Creating and Managing Volume Snapshots

Use snapshots to create a point-in-time copy (PITC) of one or more volumes.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Manually Create a Snapshot for a Volume

Create a manual snapshot if you need a copy of the data for this point in time and you do not want to create a snapshot schedule.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume.
3. In the right pane, click Create Snapshot.
• The Create Snapshot dialog box appears.
• If the volume is associated with one or more Consistent Snapshot Profiles, a confirmation dialog box appears.
4. If a confirmation dialog box appears:
• Click Yes to create snapshots for all volumes associated with the consistent Snapshot Profile.
• Click No to create a snapshot for the selected volume only.
5. In the Expire Time field, type the number of minutes, hours, days, or weeks to keep the snapshot before deleting it. If you do
not want the snapshot to expire, select Do Not Expire.
6. (Optional) In the Description field, type a description of the snapshot. The default descriptive text is "Manually Created."
7. Click OK.

View Snapshots on a Volume

View the Snapshots tab to see information about snapshots, such as Freeze Time, Expiration Time, size, and description. You can
also view the snapshots on a volume in a tree view.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume.
3. In the right pane, click the Snapshots tab.
4. Click Select View to choose Table View or Tree View.
• Table View displays all of the information for a snapshot on one screen. This information includes Freeze Time, Expire Time,
Size, Create Volume, and Snapshot Profile.
• Tree View displays a single field for each snapshot: Freeze Time, Expire Time, Size, or Description. To change the field
displayed, click Select Display Field and then select a new field.

Assign Snapshot Profiles to a Volume

Assign one or more Snapshot Profiles to a volume if you want snapshots to be created on an automated schedule.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume you want to modify.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Volume dialog box opens.

62 Storage Center Administration

4. Select the appropriate Snapshot Profiles.
a. Next to Snapshot Profiles, click Change. The Select Snapshot Profiles dialog box opens.
b. In the top pane of the dialog box, select the Snapshot Profiles to assign to the volume.
c. When you are finished, click OK. The Select Snapshot Profiles dialog box closes.
5. Click OK to close the Edit Volume dialog box.

Create a Local Recovery Volume from a Snapshot

Create a recovery volume from a snapshot if you need to access data that is contained in the snapshot. A volume created from a
snapshot accesses the same data as the original volume. The volume created from the snapshot does not consume more space
than the original volume. It will consume more space when new data is written to the new volume.
Prerequisites
QoS Profile options are shown only if Allow QoS Profile Selection has been enabled on the Storage Center Preferences dialog box
(Storage Center version 7.0 or later).
Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume.
3. In the right pane, click the Snapshots tab.
4. Right-click the snapshot from which you want to create a local recovery volume, then select Create Volume from Snapshot.
The Create Volume from Snapshot dialog box opens.
5. Select the snapshot from which you want to create a local recovery volume, then click Create Volume from Snapshot. The
Create Volume from Snapshot dialog box opens.
6. (Optional) Modify default settings for the recovery volume as needed.
• To change the volume name, modify the Name field.
• To change the parent folder for the volume, select a folder in the Volume Folder pane.
• To schedule snapshot creation and expiration for the volume, apply one or more Snapshot Profiles by clicking Change
across from Snapshot Profiles.
• To add a Volume QoS profile to be applied to the volume, click Change across from Volume QoS Profile. When the list of
defined QoS profiles opens, select a profile, then click OK. You can also apply the Default QoS Profile to a volume.
• To add a Group QoS profile to be applied to the volume, click Change across from Group QoS Profile. When the list of
defined QoS profiles opens, select a profile, then click OK.
7. Map the recovery volume to the server from which the data will be accessed.
a. Click Change across from Server. The Select Server dialog box appears.
b. Select the server, then click OK. The Select Server dialog box closes.
c. (Optional) Click Advanced Mapping to configure LUN settings, restrict mapping paths, or present the volume as read-only.
8. Click OK to create the local recovery volume.

Pause Snapshot Creation for a Volume

Pause snapshot creation for a volume to temporarily prevent Snapshot Profiles from creating automatic snapshots for the volume.
When snapshot creation is paused, the Create Snapshot option is not available when you right-click any volume on the Storage
Center.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Snapshot Profile you want to pause.
3. In the bottom right pane, select the Volumes tab.
4. Right-click the volume for which you want to pause snapshot creation. Select Edit Settings. The Edit Volume Settings dialog
box appears.
5. In the Snapshot Profiles area, select the Snapshot Creation Paused check box.
6. Click OK.

Storage Center Administration 63

Pause Snapshot Expiration for a Volume
Pause snapshot expiration for a volume to temporarily prevent Snapshot Profiles from expiring snapshots for the volume. When
snapshot expiration is paused, the Create Snapshot and Delete options are not available when you right-click any volume on the
Storage Center.

1. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Snapshot Profile you want to pause.
2. In the bottom right pane, select the Volumes tab.
3. Right-click the volume for which you want to pause snapshot expiration. Select Edit Settings. The Edit Volume Settings
dialog box appears.
4. In the Snapshot Profiles area, select the Snapshot Expiration Paused check box.
5. Click OK.

Allow the Most Recent Snapshot for a Volume to be Expired

If you do not need to keep at least one snapshot for a given volume at all times, you can allow the most recent volume snapshot to
be expired by a Snapshot Profile.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Volume dialog box appears.
4. Click Edit Advanced Volume Settings. The Edit Advanced Volume Settings dialog box appears.
5. Select the Allow Snapshots to coalesce into active Snapshot check box.
6. Click OK to close the Edit Advanced Volume Settings dialog box, then click OK to close the Edit Volume dialog box.

Expire a Snapshot Manually

If you no longer need a snapshot and you do not want to wait for it to be expired based on the Snapshot Profile, you can expire it
manually.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume you want to modify.
3. Click the Storage tab.
4. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume for which you want to expire a snapshot.
5. In the right pane, click the Snapshots tab.
6. Right-click the snapshot you want to expire, then select Expire. The Expire dialog box opens.
NOTE: To expire multiple snapshots simultaneously, hold down Shift while you select the snapshots, then right-click
a selected snapshot and select Expire.
7. Select the snapshot you want to expire, then click Expire. The Expire dialog box opens.
8. Click OK to expire the selected snapshot.

Related links
Managing Snapshot Profiles

Mapping Volumes to Servers

Mapping a volume to a server allows the server to access the volume.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Map a Volume to a Server

Map a volume to a server to allow the server to use the volume for storage.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume you want to map to a server.
3. In the right pane, click Map Volume to Server. The Map Volume to Server wizard opens.

64 Storage Center Administration

4. Select the server to which you want to map the volume, then click Next. The wizard advances to the next page.
5. (Optional) Click Advanced Mapping to configure LUN settings, restrict mapping paths, or present the volume as read-only.
6. When you are done, click Finish.

Map Multiple Volumes to a Server

Multiple volumes can be mapped to a server in a single operation.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Volumes node or the folder that contains the volumes.
3. In the right pane, select the volumes that you want to map.
• To select contiguous volumes, select the first volume, then hold down Shift and select the last volume.
• To select individual volumes, hold down Control while selecting them.
4. In the right pane, click Map Volume to Server. The Map Volume to Server wizard opens.
5. Select the server to which you want to map the volumes, then click Next. The wizard advances to the next page.
6. (Optional) Click Advanced Mapping to restrict mapping paths or present the volumes as read-only.
7. When you are done, click Finish.

Unmap a Volume from a Server

Unmap a volume from a server if the server no longer needs to access the volume.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume you want to unmap from a server.
3. In the right pane, click Remove Mappings. The Remove Mappings dialog box opens.
4. Select the server(s) to unmap from the volume, then click OK. If the volume is the destination of a replication and you selected
the mapping to the source Storage Center, a confirmation dialog box appears.
5. If a confirmation dialog box appears:
• Click OK to remove the mapping to the source Storage Center, which might interfere with the replication.
• Click Cancel to keep the mapping to the source Storage Center.

Unmap Multiple Volumes from Servers

Multiple volumes can be unmapped from servers in a single operation.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Volumes node or the folder that contains the volumes.
3. In the right pane, use shift+click and/or control+click to select multiple volumes.
4. Right-click the selection, then select Remove Mappings. The Remove Mappings dialog box appears.
5. Select the volume/server mappings to remove, then click OK. If a volume is the destination of a replication and you selected
the mapping to the source Storage Center, a confirmation dialog box appears.
6. If a confirmation dialog box appears:
• Click OK to remove the mapping to the source Storage Center, which might interfere with the replication.
• Click Cancel to keep the mapping to the source Storage Center.

Promote a Volume Mapping from a Server to a Server Cluster

If a volume is mapped to a server that belongs to a server cluster, you can promote the mapping to the server cluster so that it is
mapped on all servers in the cluster.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume.
3. In the right pane, click the Mappings tab.
4. In the right pane, select the server for which you want to promote the mapping, then click Promote to Cluster. The Promote
to Cluster dialog box appears.
5. Click OK.

Storage Center Administration 65

Demote a Mapping from a Server Cluster to an Individual Server
If a volume is mapped to a server cluster, you can demote the mapping so that it is mapped to one of the servers that belongs to
the cluster.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume.
3. In the right pane, click the Mappings tab.
4. In the right pane, select the server for which you want to demote the mapping, then click Demote from Cluster. The Demote
from Cluster dialog box opens.
5. Click OK.

Deploy a Bootable Volume Image to a New Server

Copy a bootable volume image and map it to a new server to streamline the server deployment process.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume you want to copy.
3. In the right pane, click Create Boot from SAN Copy. The Create Boot from SAN Copy dialog box opens.
4. (Optional) Modify default settings for the volume copy as needed.
• To change the volume name, modify the Name field.
• To change the parent folder for the volume, select a folder in the Volume Folder pane.
• To schedule snapshot creation and expiration for the volume, apply one or more Snapshot Profiles by clicking Change
across from Snapshot Profiles.
5. Map the recovery volume to the server that will boot from it.
a. Click Change across from Server. The Select Server dialog box appears.
b. Select the server, then click OK. The Select Server dialog box closes.
c. (Optional) Click Advanced Mapping to configure LUN settings, restrict mapping paths, or present the volume as read-only.
6. When you are finished, click OK.

Change the LUN Used by a Volume/Server Mapping

The logical unit number identifies the volume to the server operating system.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume.
3. In the right pane, click the Mappings tab.
4. In the right pane, select the server for which you want to modify mapping settings, then click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings
wizard opens.
5. Click Continue. The wizard advances to the next page.
6. Configure the LUN settings:
• To specify a specific LUN number, clear the Use next available LUN check box, then type the LUN in the LUN to use
when mapping to Volume field.
• To assign the next unused LUN for the server, select the Use next available LUN check box.
• To make the volume bootable, select the Map volume using LUN 0 check box.
7. When you are finished, click OK.

Specify Which Controller Processes IO for a Volume/Server Mapping

For dual-controller Storage Centers, you can manually specify which controller processes IO for a volume/server mapping. By
default, the Storage Center automatically chooses a controller.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume.
3. In the right pane, click the Mappings tab.

66 Storage Center Administration

4. In the right pane, select the server for which you want to modify mapping settings, then click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings
wizard appears.
5. Click Continue. The wizard advances to the next page.
6. Clear the Allow the Storage Center to automatically determine the best Controller to activate Volume on check box.
7. From the Activate Volume on Controller drop-down menu, select the controller that should process IO for the volume/server
mapping.
8. When you are finished, click OK.

Limit the Number of Paths That Can Be Used for a Volume/Server Mapping
You can specify the maximum number of paths used by servers that support multipath IO.

1. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume.

2. In the right pane, click the Mappings tab.
3. In the right pane, select the server for which you want to modify mapping settings, then click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings
wizard opens.
4. Click Continue. The wizard advances to the next page.
5. Use the arrows next to the Maximum number of paths per Server field to increase or decrease the path limit.
6. When you are finished, click OK.

Change a Volume/Server Mapping to Read-Only

To prevent a server from writing to a volume, change the volume/server mapping to read-only.

1. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume.

2. In the right pane, click the Mappings tab.
3. In the right pane, select the server for which you want to modify mapping settings, then click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings
wizard opens.
4. Click Continue. The wizard advances to the next page.
5. Select the The volume should be presented as read-only to the server check box.
6. When you are finished, click OK.

Deleting Volumes and Volume Folders

Delete volumes and volume folders when they are no longer needed.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Delete a Volume
By default, a deleted volume is moved to the Recycle Bin.
About this task
CAUTION: You can recover a volume from the Recycle Bin, but after the Recycle Bin is emptied, data on that volume
cannot be recovered.
Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume you want to delete.
3. In the right pane, click Delete. The Delete dialog box opens.
CAUTION: Do not select Skip Recycle Bin and permanently delete volumes unless you want to immediately delete
the volume without saving the metadata in the Recycle Bin. This option permanently deletes the volume, preventing
you from recovering the data.
4. Click OK to delete the volume. The volume is marked for deletion and moved to the Recycle Bin.

Storage Center Administration 67

Restore a Volume from the Recycle Bin
Restore a volume from the Recycle Bin if you need to retain the volume instead of deleting it.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume in the Recycle Bin that you want to restore.
3. In the right pane, click Restore Volume. The volume is moved from the Recycle Bin to its previous location.

Empty the Recycle Bin

Empty the Recycle Bin if you are sure you want to delete the recycled volume(s).
About this task
CAUTION: After the Recycle Bin is emptied, data on a recycled volume(s) cannot be recovered.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select Recycle Bin.
3. In the right pane, click Empty Recycle Bin. The Empty Recycle Bin dialog box opens.
4. Click OK to confirm that you want to permanently delete all volumes in the Recycle Bin.

Delete a Volume Folder

A volume folder must be empty before it can be deleted. If the deleted volumes from the folder are in the Recycle Bin, the volume
folder is not considered empty and cannot be deleted.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume folder you want to move.
3. In the right pane, click Delete. The Delete dialog box opens.
4. Click OK to delete the folder.

Managing Data Reduction

Data Reduction uses compression and deduplication to decrease the amount of disk space used by volume data. Compression
reduces the amount of space used by a volume by encoding data. Deduplication finds duplicate pages and removes them,
conserving the disk space that would be used by additional copies. When deduplication is used, compression is also applied to a
volume.
NOTE: Data Reduction is available in Storage Center version 7.0 or later.

Data Eligible for Data Reduction

To reduce the impact of Data Reduction on read and write operations, a limited amount of data is eligible for compression and
deduplication. Data Reduction Input limits the type of data that is eligible for Data Reduction. The following options are available for
Data Reduction Input.

• Inaccessible Snapshot Pages – Allows Data Reduction to process data frozen by a snapshot and made inaccessible by new
data written over the original data in the snapshot.
• All Snapshot Pages – Allows Data Reduction to process data frozen by a snapshot.

Change the Data Reduction Input

Change the Data Reduction Input for a volume to change the type of data that compression and deduplication reduces.
Prerequisites
Data Reduction must be applied to the volume.

68 Storage Center Administration

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select a volume.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Volume dialog box opens.
4. Click Edit Advanced Volume Settings.
The Edit Advanced Volume Settings dialog box opens.
5. From the Data Reduction Input drop-down menu, select a Data Reduction input.
• Inaccessible Snapshot Pages – Data frozen by a snapshot that has become inaccessible because other data has been
written over it
• All Snapshot Pages – Data frozen by a snapshot
6. Click OK to close the Edit Advanced Volume Settings dialog box.
7. Click OK.

Supported Hardware Platforms

The following controller series support Data Reduction:

• SC4000
• SC8000
• SC9000

Compression
Compression reduces the amount of space used by a volume by encoding data. Compression runs daily with Data Progression. To
change the time at which compression runs, reschedule Data Progression. Compression does not run with an on-demand Data
Progression.
When compressed data is read, it is temporarily uncompressed in memory until the read is complete. When compression is disabled,
pages are permanently uncompressed during the next compression cycle, and the original compressed page is deleted as time and
resources permit. When a volume is deleted or a snapshot is coalesced, the related compressed data is also deleted.

Deleted data might create gaps in the compressed page, which can be filled with new compressed data. In addition, compressed
pages are defragmented during Data Progression to remove gaps and use space more efficiently.

The Compression Savings amount is determined by comparing the total amount of space saved from all compressed pages to the
total amount of used space that is eligible for compression. For example, if compression saves 1 GB on a volume with 10 GB of used
space that is eligible for compression, the amount saved is 10 percent.

Apply Data Compression to a Volume

Apply Data Compression to a volume to reduce disk space usage for that volume.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select a volume.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Volume dialog box opens.
4. From the Data Reduction Profile drop-down list, select Compression.
5. Click OK.

Related links
Creating Volumes
Modifying Volumes

Storage Center Administration 69

Deduplication
Deduplication reduces the space used by a volume by identifying and deleting duplicate pages. Deduplication requires SSD drives.

Apply Deduplication With Compression to a Volume

Apply Deduplication with Compression to reduce the size of the volume. Deduplication and compression run during daily Data
Progression.
Prerequisites
Allow Data Reduction Selection must be enabled in the Preferences tab of the Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box.
About this task
NOTE: The amount of space saved by Data Reduction is determined by the amount of data eligible for Data Reduction
on the volume compared to the total amount of space used by that data on disk after Data Reduction.
Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select a volume.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Volume dialog box opens.
4. From the Data Reduction Profile drop-down menu, select Deduplication with Compression.

View Amount of Space Saved by Data Reduction

The total amount of space saved by Data Reduction depends on the amount of data eligible for Data Reduction and the type of data
being processed. Certain types of data will be reduced more effectively than others. The amount of volume data eligible for Data
Reduction is determined by the size of the data frozen by snapshots, and the Data Reduction Input setting.

Data Savings Ratios

System Data Reduction Ratio and System Data Efficiency Ratio show the data savings on the Storage Center using the available
disk space-saving features.
System Data Reduction Ratio

Compares the amount of space that would used by pages that are eligible for compression and deduplication to the amount of
space actually used by those pages after Storage Center applies Data Reduction.

System Data Efficiency Ratio

Indicates the efficiency of compression, deduplication, RAID, and Thin Provisioning

View Amount of Space Saved for a Storage Type

Storage Center determines the total percentage of space saved for all volumes in a Storage Type by comparing the amount of
space processed by Data Reduction to the amount of space used after Data Reduction.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Storage Types.
3. Select a Storage Type. The space saved by Data Reduction is displayed at the bottom of the Summary tab.

View Amount of Space Saved by Data Reduction on a Volume

The percentage of space saved by Data Reduction for a volume is an estimate found by comparing the total amount of space saved
by compression and deduplication with the total amount of space processed by Data Reduction in the volume.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select a volume.
3. In the right pane, click the Statistics tab. The amount of space saved by Data Reduction on that volume is displayed at the
bottom of the Statistics tab.

70 Storage Center Administration

Change the Default Data Reduction Profile
The default Data Reduction profile determines what type of Data Reduction is applied to new volumes created by that Storage
Manager user. Allow Data Reduction Selection allows the Data Reduction options to appear when creating volumes.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Preferences tab.
3. From the Data Reduction Profile drop-down list, select the default Data Reduction profile.
• Select Compression to apply compression to all new volumes.
• Select Deduplication with Compression to apply deduplication and compression to all new volumes.

Pause or Resume Data Reduction

Pause Data Reduction on a volume to prevent deduplication and/or compression from running during Data Progression. After
pausing Data Reduction, compression and deduplication stop running on new data but the existing data is not uncompressed.
Pausing Data Reduction on a volume pauses deduplication and/or compression on all view volumes created from the original
volume.

Pause or Resume Data Reduction for a Volume

Pausing Data Reduction for a volume prevents compression and deduplication from happening until Data Reduction is resumed.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Volumes.
3. Select a volume.
4. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Volume dialog box opens.
5. Pause or resume Data Reduction on the volume.
• To pause Data Reduction, select the Data Reduction Paused checkbox.
• To resume Data Reduction, clear the Data Reduction Paused checkbox.
6. Click OK.

Pause or Resume Data Reduction for all Volumes

Pausing Data Reduction from the Storage Center Edit Settings dialog box pauses compression and deduplication for all volumes in
that Storage Center.
About this task
NOTE: Pause Data Reduction cannot be applied to other Storage Centers from the Storage Center Edit Settings dialog
box using inherit settings.
Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Storage tab.
3. Pause or resume Data Reduction on all volumes.
• To pause Data Reduction, select the Pause Data Reduction check box.
• To resume Data Reduction, clear the Pause Data Reduction check box.
4. Click OK.

Disable Data Reduction for a Volume

Disabling Data Reduction on a volume permanently uncompresses the reduced data starting the next Data Progression cycle.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the volume you want to modify.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Volume dialog box opens.
4. From the Data Reduction Profile drop-down menu, select None.

Storage Center Administration 71

5. Click OK.

Managing Snapshot Profiles

A Snapshot Profile is a collection of rules describing when to take periodic snapshots for one or more volumes and the time at which
snapshots are deleted (expired).
A snapshot is a point-in-time copy (PITC) of one or more volumes. Storage Center snapshots differ from traditional snapshots/
PITCs because blocks of data or pages are frozen and not copied. No user data is moved, making the process efficient in both time
taken to complete the snapshot, and space used by snapshots.

NOTE: If two or more snapshots are scheduled to be created at the same time for a given volume, the Storage Center
creates only one snapshot. The snapshot that has the longest expiration time is created, and the other scheduled
snapshots are ignored.
Related links
Attributes That Determine Volume Behavior

Default Snapshot Profiles

By default, Storage Center provides two standard Snapshot Profiles that cannot be deleted.

• Daily: Creates a snapshot every day at 12:01 AM, and expires the snapshot in one week.
• Sample: Applies three schedule rules:

– Creates a snapshot every 12 hours between 12:05 AM and 6 PM, expiring in five days.
– Creates a snapshot on the first day of every month at 11:30 PM, expiring in 26 weeks.
– Creates a snapshot every Saturday at 11:30 PM, expiring in 5 weeks.

Non-Consistent and Consistent Snapshot Profiles

When a snapshot is taken for a volume, IO is halted to allow the operation to take place. A consistent Snapshot Profile halts IO to all
associated volumes until a snapshot is taken for each volume, ensuring that the snapshots contain data for the same time period. A
non-consistent Snapshot Profile creates snapshots for associated volumes without guaranteeing that the snapshots will finish at the
same time, which is less resource intensive.

Consistent Snapshot Profile Non-Consistent Snapshot Profile

Halts IO across all volumes as a group Halts IO for each volume independently of other volumes.

Resource intensive Less resource intensive — depends on the amount of data

written since the previous snapshot

Number of volumes limited based on storage controller. No limit to the number of volumes to which the Snapshot Profile
• SC8000, SC9000, and SC7020: 100 is attached
• SCv2000: 25
• SC4020: 40

Snapshots are taken of all volumes simultaneously Choose between Standard (one volume at a time) or Parallel (all
volumes simultaneously)

Can set an Alert if snapshots cannot be completed within a All snapshots are taken
defined time. Snapshots not completed before alert is generated
are not taken. (This suspension can lead to incomplete groups of
snapshots across volumes.)

Can delete incomplete group of snapshots All snapshots are taken

Can be converted to Non-Consistent Snapshot Profile Can be converted to Consistent Snapshot Profile

72 Storage Center Administration

Creating and Applying Snapshot Profiles
To create and expire snapshots automatically, create a Snapshot Profile and apply it to one or more volumes or servers.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Create a Snapshot Profile

Create a Snapshot Profile to define automated snapshot creation and expiration schedules that can be applied to volumes.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select Snapshot Profiles.
3. In the right pane, click Create Snapshot Profile. The Create Snapshot Profile dialog box opens.
4. In the Name field, type a name for the Snapshot Profile.
5. Add a rule to the Snapshot Profile.
a. Click Add Rule. The Add Rule dialog box opens.
b. From the drop-down menu, select the frequency at which the rule runs.
c. Configure the date(s) and time(s) at which you want snapshots to be created.
d. In the Expiration field, type the length of time to keep snapshots before deleting them.
e. Click OK. The Add Rule dialog box closes.
6. (Optional) Create additional rules as necessary.
7. From the Snapshot Creation Method drop-down menu, select an option to control how snapshots triggered by the Snapshot
Profile are created.
• Standard – When selected, takes snapshots in series for all volumes associated with the snapshot.
• Parallel – When selected, takes snapshots simultaneously for all volumes associated with the snapshot.
• Consistent – When selected, halts IO and takes snapshots for all volumes associated with the snapshot. Provides options
for timing out snapshot creation and expiring incomplete snapshots.
8. When you are finished, click OK.

Apply a Snapshot Profile to One or More Volumes

To add snapshot creation and expiration schedules to a volume, associate a Snapshot Profile with the volume.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Snapshot Profile.
3. In the right pane, click Apply to Volumes. The Apply to Volumes dialog box opens.
4. Select the volumes to which you want to apply the Snapshot Profile. To select individual volumes in a volume folder, expand
the folder and select each volume individually.
5. (Optional) To remove existing Snapshot Profiles from the selected volumes, select Replace existing Snapshot Profiles.
6. Click OK.

Apply a Snapshot Profile to a Server

To add snapshot creation and expiration schedules to all volumes mapped to a server, associate a Snapshot Profile with the server.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Snapshot Profile.
3. In the right pane, click Apply to Server. The Apply to Server dialog box opens.
4. Select the server to which you want to apply the Snapshot Profile. To select individual servers in a server cluster, expand the
cluster and select each server individually.
NOTE: If you apply a Snapshot Profile to a server cluster, the Snapshot Profile is applied only to the volumes that
are mapped directly to the server cluster. Volumes that are mapped exclusively to servers that belong to the cluster
are not affected.
5. (Optional) To remove existing Snapshot Profiles from the selected server, select Replace existing Snapshot Profiles.

Storage Center Administration 73

6. Click OK.

Create a Snapshot for all Volumes Associated with a Snapshot Profile

You can create a snapshot for all volumes associated with a Snapshot Profile instead of manually creating a snapshot for each
volume.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Snapshot Profile.
3. In the right pane, click Create Snapshot. The Create Snapshot dialog box opens.
4. Click New Snapshot. The New Snapshot dialog box opens.
5. In the Expire Time field, type the number of minutes, hours, days, or weeks to keep the snapshot before deleting it. If you do
not want the snapshot to expire, select Do Not Expire.
6. (Optional) In the Description field, type a description of the snapshot. The default descriptive text is "Manually Created."
7. Click OK.

Modifying Snapshot Profiles

Modify a Snapshot Profile to change the automated snapshot creation and expiration schedules that are applied to the associated
volumes. Changes to a Snapshot Profile affect only new snapshots taken with the modified Snapshot Profile. Existing snapshots are
not changed.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Rename a Snapshot Profile

Use the Edit Snapshot Profile dialog box to rename a Snapshot Profile.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Snapshot Profile that you want to modify.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Snapshot Profile dialog box opens.
4. In the Name field, type a new name for the Snapshot Profile.
5. Click OK.

Modify Rules for a Snapshot Profile

Snapshot Profile rules determine when snapshots are created and expired.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Snapshot Profile that you want to modify.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Snapshot Profile dialog box opens.
4. (Optional) Add a rule to the Snapshot Profile.
a. Click Add Rule. The Add Rule dialog box appears.
b. From the drop-down menu, select the frequency at which the rule runs.
c. Configure the dates and times at which you want snapshots to be created.
d. In the Expiration field, type the length of time to keep snapshots before deleting them.
e. Click OK. The Add Rule dialog box closes.
5. (Optional) Modify the existing rules as needed.
• To modify a rule, select the rule, then click Edit Rule.
• To remove a rule, select the rule, then click Remove Rule.
6. Click OK.

74 Storage Center Administration

Change the Snapshot Creation Method for a Snapshot Profile
The snapshot creation method controls how snapshots triggered by the Snapshot Profile are created.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Snapshot Profile that you want to modify.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Snapshot Profile dialog box opens.
4. From the Snapshot Creation Method drop-down menu, select an option to control how snapshots triggered by the Snapshot
Profile are created.
• Standard – When selected, takes snapshots in series for all volumes associated with the snapshot.
• Parallel – When selected, takes snapshots simultaneously for all volumes associated with the snapshot.
• Consistent – When selected, halts IO and takes snapshots for all volumes associated with the snapshot. Provides options
for timing out snapshot creation and expiring incomplete snapshots.
5. Click OK.

Delete a Snapshot Profile

A Snapshot Profile cannot be deleted if it is being used by any volumes.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Snapshot Profile.
3. Make sure the Snapshot Profile is not in use by any volumes.
4. In the right pane, click Delete. The Delete dialog box opens.
5. Click OK.

Managing Expiration Rules for Remote Snapshots

By default, Snapshot Profiles applied to remote volumes have the same rules for expiration as for local volumes. However, you can
specify different expiration rules for remote volumes if needed.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Create Snapshot Profile Expiration Rules for Remote Snapshots

Create remote expiration rules for a Snapshot Profile if you want the remote snapshots to expire on a different schedule than the
local snapshots.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Snapshot Profile.
3. In the Schedule Rules pane, right-click the schedule and select Edit Remote Snapshot Expiration. The Edit Remote
Snapshot Expiration dialog box appears.
4. Configure the remote snapshot expiration rule.
a. Select the remote Storage Center(s) for which you want to specify an expiration rule for the snapshots.
b. In the Remote Expiration field, type the number of minutes, hours, days, or weeks to keep the remote snapshot before
deleting it.
c. Click OK.

Modify a Snapshot Profile Expiration Rule for Remote Snapshots

Modify a remote expiration rule for a Snapshot Profile to change the time at which remote snapshots are expired.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Snapshot Profile.
3. In the right pane, click the Remote Expiration Rules tab.
4. Right-click the remote expiration rule and select Edit Remote Snapshot Expiration. The Edit Remote Snapshot Expiration
dialog box appears.
5. Configure the remote snapshot expiration rule.

Storage Center Administration 75

 a. In the Remote Expiration field, type the number of minutes, hours, days, or weeks to keep the remote snapshot before
deleting it.
b. Click OK.

Managing Storage Profiles

Storage Profiles describe the RAID level and tiers on which data is stored.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Related links
Attributes That Determine Volume Behavior

Create a Storage Profile

Create a Storage Profile if you want to specify custom RAID level and tier settings that can be applied to one or more volumes.
Prerequisites
In your Storage Center User Volume Defaults, the Allow Storage Profile selection check box must be selected.

About this task

NOTE: SCv2000 series controllers cannot create Storage Profiles.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. From the Storage Center Actions menu, select Storage Profile > Create Storage Profile. The Create Storage Profile dialog
box appears.
3. Configure the Storage Profile.
a. In the Name field, type a name for the Storage Profile.
b. From the Raid Type Used drop-down menu, select the RAID level(s) used for volumes associated with the Storage Profile.
c. In the Storage Tiers area, select the Storage Tiers (disk classes) that can be used for volumes associated with the Storage
Profile.
4. Click OK.

Apply a Storage Profile to One or More Volumes

Apply a Storage Profile to a volume to specify the RAID level and tiers used by the volume.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Storage Profile.
3. In the right pane, click Apply to Volume(s). The Apply to Volume(s) dialog box appears.
4. Select the volume(s) to which you want to apply the Storage Profile.
5. Click OK.

Apply a Storage Profile to a Server

Apply a Storage Profile to a server to specify the RAID level and tiers used by all volumes that are mapped to the server.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Storage Profile.
3. In the right pane, click Apply to Server. The Apply to Server dialog box appears.
4. Select the server to which you want to apply the Storage Profile.
5. Click OK.

76 Storage Center Administration

Delete a Storage Profile
Delete a Storage Profile if it is no longer needed.
Prerequisites
• In your Storage Center User Volume Defaults, the Allow Storage Profile selection check box must be selected.
• The Storage Profile cannot be applied to any volumes.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Storage Profile.
3. In the right pane, click Delete. The Delete dialog box appears.
4. Click OK.

Related links
User Interface for Storage Center Management

Managing QoS Profiles

QoS profiles describe QoS settings that can be applied to volumes.
By defining QoS profiles to apply to volumes, you potentially limit I/Os that the volumes can perform, and also define their relative
priority during times of congestion.

You can also define a group QoS profile that can be applied to multiple volumes to limit the I/Os that the volumes can do in
aggregate.

Create a QoS Profile

QoS profiles include a set of attributes that control the QoS behavior for any volume to which it is applied.
Prerequisites
• To enable users to set QoS profiles for a Storage Center, the Allow QoS Profile Selection option must be selected on the
Preferences → Edit Storage Center Settings table.
• To enable QoS profiles to be enforced, the QoS Limits Enabled and Server Load Equalizer Enabled options must be selected
on the Edit Storage Center Settings → Storage page.

Steps
1. In the Storage tab navigation tab, right-click QoS Profiles and select Create QoS Profile.
The Create QoS Profile dialog box opens.
2. Configure the QoS profile.
a. In the Name field, type a name for the QoS profile.
b. Select a profile type: either Volume QoS Profile or Group QoS Profile.
c. (Optional for volume QoS profiles only) In the Relative Priority field, type a number to identify the priority compared to
other QoS profiles,
d. (Optional for volume QoS profiles only) Select Enable Latency Threshold Alert, then type a value in microseconds for the
latency alert threshold.
e. (Optional) Select Limit by IOPS, then type a value for the maximum IO per second allowed.
f. (Optional) Select Limit by Bandwidth, then type a value for maximum MB per second allowed.
3. Click OK.

Edit a QoS Profile

Modify the QoS profile to change the attributes that control the QoS for any volume or group to which it is applied.

1. In the Storage tab navigation tab, right-click QoS Profiles and select Edit Settings.

Storage Center Administration 77

 The Edit QoS Profile dialog box opens.
2. Where allowed, modify the values. The profile type field cannot be modified.
3. Click OK.

Delete a QoS Volume Profile

Delete a QoS profile for a volume.
Prerequisites
Only QoS profiles that are not currently in use by any volume can be deleted. The Default QoS Volume profile cannot be deleted
even if there are no volumes assigned to it. Group QoS Profiles can be removed or reassigned; however, Volume QoS profiles can
be reassigned only.
Steps
1. In the Storage tab navigation tab, expand QoS Profiles and select the profile to be deleted.
2. Right-click the profile and select Delete.
A confirmation dialog box opens to request approval for the deletion.
3. Click OK.

Apply a QoS Profile to a Volume

Apply a previously defined QoS profile to a volume.
Prerequisites
The QoS profile must already exist.
Steps
1. Expand the QoS Profiles navigation tree. Right-click the name of the QoS profile.
2. Select Apply to Volumes.
The Apply to Volumes dialog box opens.
3. Select the checkbox next to each volume to which you want to apply the QoS profile.
4. Click OK.

Remove a Group QoS Profile From a Volume

Remove a Group QoS profile previously associated with one or more volumes.

1. Expand the QoS Profile navigation tree and then expand the Group QoS Profiles navigation tree.
2. Right-click the Group QoS profile to be removed and select Remove Group Profile from Volume.
A dialog box opens to show the volumes associated with the QoS profile.
3. Select the checkbox next to each volume from which you want to remove the QoS profile.
4. Click OK.

Importing Volumes from an EqualLogic PS Series Storage Array

Storage Center can import volumes from an EqualLogic PS Series Storage Array. There are two methods for importing data from an
external device, offline and online. Offline import copies the data from the source volume to the destination volume. Online import
maps the destination volume to the server and accepts IO during the import.

Offline Import
Offline import migrates a Volume from the source to the destination. The volume must then be mapped to the server after the
import.

78 Storage Center Administration

Online Import
Online import creates a destination volume, maps it to the server, then migrates the data to the destination volume. IO from the
server continues to both the destination and source volumes during the import. Importing using the Online method can take longer
than offline due to IO continuing to the volume from the server.

Connect to an External Device (iSCSI)

After cabling an external device to Storage Center using iSCSI, configure Storage Center to communicate with the external device.
Prerequisites
The external device must be connected to the controller using iSCSI.
Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. From the Storage tab navigation pane, select an iSCSI fault domain from the Fault Domains node.
3. Click Create Remote Connection.
The Create Remote Connection dialog box appears.
4. In the Remote IPv4 Address field, type the IPv4 address of the external device.
5. From the iSCSI Network Type drop-down menu, select the general speed of the network.
6. Click Finish.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
7. Click OK.

PS Series Storage Array Import Requirements

A PS Series storage array must meet the following requirements to import data to a Storage Center storage system.

Component Requirement
PS Series Firmware Version 6.0.11 or higher

Connectivity iSCSI

Network Low-Latency, High-Bandwidth

Volume Settings • Limit access to the volume by Storage Center IP or iSCSI initiator name.
• Enable Allow simultaneous connections from initiators with different IQNs in the
volume advanced settings.
• Stop all IO from the server to the volume.

Storage Center Import Requirements

A Storage Center storage system must meet the following requirements to import data from a PS Series storage array.

Component Requirement
Storage Center OS version Version 6.7 or higher

Connectivity iSCSI

Network Low-Latency, High-Bandwidth

Performing an Offline Import from an External Device

Importing data from an external device copies data from the external device to a new destination volume in Storage Center.
Complete the following task to import data from an external device.
Prerequisites
• An external device must be connected into the Storage Center

Storage Center Administration 79

• The destination volume must be unmapped from the server

About this task

NOTE: Before importing data from an external device, follow the instructions in the Thin Import Data Migration Guide
located on Dell TechCenter.
Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. From the External Devices node in the Storage tab navigation pane, select an external device.
3. Click Offline Import from External Device.
The Offline Import from External Device dialog box appears.
4. Modify the Destination Volume Attributes as needed.
NOTE: For more information, click Help.
5. (Optional) Create a new Replication quality of service (QoS) definition.
a. Click Create QoS Node.
The Create Replication QoS dialog box appears.
b. In the Name field, type a name for the QoS definition.
c. In the Link Speed field, specify the speed of the link in megabits per second (Mbps) or gigabits per second (Gbps).
d. Select the Bandwidth Limited check box, then click Finish.
6. Click OK.

Related links
Create a Storage Profile
Create a Snapshot Profile
Managing Volumes

80 Storage Center Administration

 5
Storage Center Server Administration
Storage Manager allows you to allocate storage on each Storage Center for the servers in your environment. Servers that are
connected to Storage Centers can also be registered to Storage Manager to streamline storage management and to run Space
Recovery for Windows servers.

Server Management Options

To present storage to a server, a corresponding server object must be added to the Storage Center. You can manage servers
individually for each Storage Center and/or centrally manage servers by registering them to Storage Manager.

Managing Storage Center Server Objects

Storage Center server objects are managed individually for each Storage Center from the Storage tab.Storage Centers have no
knowledge about the servers other than the operating system, which must be manually specified.

Figure 9. Storage Tab Servers Node

Creating Servers
Create a server to allow a Storage Center to pass IO through the ports on that server. After a server is created, volumes can be
mapped to it.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Create a Physical Server

Create a physical server object to represent a physical server in your environment.

1. Make sure the server HBAs have connectivity to the Storage Center HBAs.
• iSCSI – Configure the iSCSI initiator on the server to use the Storage Center HBAs as the target.
• Fibre Channel – Configure Fibre Channel zoning to allow the server HBAs and Storage Center HBAs to communicate.

Storage Center Server Administration 81

 • SAS (SCv2000 series controllers only) – Directly connect the controller to a server using SAS ports configured as front-
end connections.
2. Click the Storage tab.
3. Select Servers in the Storage tab navigation pane.
4. In the right pane, click Create Server. The Create Server dialog box appears.

Figure 10. Create Server Dialog Box

5. Configure the server attributes. These attributes are described in the online help.
a. Enter a name for the server in the Name field.
b. To add the server to a server folder, click Change, select a folder, and click OK.
c. Select the operating system for the server from the Operating System drop-down menu.
d. To generate Storage Center alerts when connectivity is lost between the Storage Center and the server, select Alert On
Lost Connectivity.
e. To generate Storage Center alerts when the Storage Center only has partial connection to the server, select Alert On
Partial Connectivity.
f. Select or define one or more HBAs for the server.
• If one or more server HBAs are visible to the Storage Center, select them in the Host Bus Adapters table.
• If a server HBA is not visible to the Storage Center, click Manually Add HBA to define it manually. For SAS front-end
connections, use the SAS device name as the world wide name (WWN) to manually add the HBA.

NOTE: IP addresses can be added for HBAs that will be installed on the server in the future. When the HBA that
uses that IP address is installed, it will be configured and ready to use.
6. Click OK.

Create a Virtual Server

Create a virtual server object to represent a virtual machine in your environment.
Prerequisites
The server that hosts the virtual server must be added as a physical server.

Steps
1. Make sure the server HBAs have connectivity to the Storage Center HBAs.
• iSCSI – Configure the iSCSI initiator on the server to use the Storage Center HBAs as the target.
• Fibre Channel – Configure Fibre Channel zoning to allow the server HBAs and Storage Center HBAs to communicate.

82 Storage Center Server Administration

 • SAS (SCv2000 series controllers only) – Directly connect the controller to a server using SAS ports configured as front-
end connections.
2. Click the Storage tab.
3. Select the server that hosts the virtual server in the Storage tab navigation pane.
4. In the right pane, click Create Virtual Server. The Create Virtual Server dialog box opens.

Figure 11. Create Virtual Server Dialog Box

5. Configure the server attributes. These attributes are described in the online help.
a. Enter a name for the server in the Name field.
b. To add the server to a server folder, click Change, select a folder, and click OK.
c. Select the operating system for the server from the Operating System drop-down menu.
d. To generate Storage Center alerts when connectivity is lost between the Storage Center and the server, select Alert On
Lost Connectivity.
e. To generate Storage Center alerts when the Storage Center only has partial connection to the server, select Alert On
Partial Connectivity.
f. Select or define one or more HBAs for the server.
• If one or more server HBAs are visible to the Storage Center, select them in the Host Bus Adapters table.
• If a server HBA is not visible to the Storage Center, click Manually Add HBA to define it manually. For SAS front-end
connections, use the SAS device name as the world wide name (WWN) to manually add the HBA.

NOTE: IP addresses can be added for HBAs that will be installed on the server in the future. When the HBA that
uses that IP address is installed, it will be configured and ready to use.
6. Click OK.

Create a Server Cluster

Create a server cluster object to represent a cluster of servers in your environment.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. Select Servers in the Storage tab navigation pane.
3. In the right pane, click Create Server Cluster. The Create Server Cluster dialog box opens.

Storage Center Server Administration 83

 Figure 12. Create Server Cluster Dialog Box

4. Configure the server cluster attributes. These attributes are described in the online help.
a. Enter a name for the server in the Name field.
b. To add the server cluster to a server folder, click Change, select a folder, and click OK.
c. From the Operating System drop-down menu, select the operating system for the cluster.
NOTE: All servers in a server cluster must be running the same operating system.
d. To generate Storage Center alerts when connectivity is lost between the Storage Center and the server(s), select Alert On
Lost Connectivity.
5. Add servers to the server cluster.
• To add an existing server to the cluster, click Add Server to Cluster, select the server to add, and then click OK.
• To define a new server, click Create New Server, configure the server attributes, and then click OK. For user interface
reference information, click Help.

• To add an existing server to the cluster, select the servers from the servers list.
• To define a new server, click New Server, configure the server attributes, and then click OK.
6. Click OK.

Create a Server from the localhost

Configure a localhost to access block level storage on the Storage Center.
Prerequisites
• Client must be running on a system with a 64-bit operating system.
• The local host must be running a supported Windows or Linux operating system.
• The Dell Storage Manager Client must be run by a user with the Administrator privilege.
• On a Storage Center with Fibre Channel IO ports, configure Fibre Channel zoning before starting this procedure.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab, click Servers.
3. Click Create Server from localhost.
The Set up localhost for Storage Center wizard opens.
• If the Storage Center has iSCSI ports and the host is not connected to any interface, the Log into Storage Center via
iSCSI page appears. Select the target fault domains, and then click Log In.
• In all other cases, proceed to the next step.
4. On the Verify localhost Information page, verify that the information is correct. Then click Create Server.
The server definition is created on the Storage Center for the connected and partially connected initiators.

84 Storage Center Server Administration

5. The Host Setup Successful page displays the best practices that were set by the wizard and best practices that were not set.
Make a note of any best practices that were not set by the wizard. It is recommended that these updates are applied manually
before starting IO to the Storage Center.
6. (Optional) Place a check next to Create a Volume for this host to create a volume after finishing host setup.
7. Click Finish.

Create a Server from a VMware vSphere Host

Configure a VMware vSphere host to access block level storage on the Storage Center.
Prerequisites
• Client must be running on a system with a 64-bit operating system.
• The Dell Storage Manager Client must be run by a user with the Administrator privilege.
• On a Storage Center with Fibre Channel IO ports, configure Fibre Channel zoning before starting this procedure.

About this task

NOTE: Block level storage cannot be set up for a VMware cluster on a Storage Center with SAS IO ports.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab, click Servers.
3. Click Create Server from a VMware vSphere or vCenter.
The Set Up VMware Host on Storage Center wizard appears.
4. Enter the IP address or hostname, the user name and password. Then click Next.
• If the Storage Center has iSCSI ports and the host is not connected to any interface, the Log into Storage Center via
iSCSI page appears. Select the target fault domains, and then click Log In.
• In all other cases, the Verify vSphere Information page appears. Proceed to the next step.
5. Select an available port, and then click Create Server.
The server definition is created on the Storage Center.
6. The Host Setup Successful page displays the best practices that were set by the wizard and best practices that were not set.
Make a note of any best practices that were not set by the wizard. It is recommended that these updates are applied manually
before starting IO to the Storage Center.
7. (Optional) Place a check next to Create a Volume for this host to create a volume after finishing host setup.
8. Click Finish.

Create a Server from a VMware vCenter Host

Configure a VMware vCenter cluster to access block level storage on the Storage Center.
Prerequisites
• Client must be running on a system with a 64-bit operating system.
• The Dell Storage Manager Client must be run by a user with the Administrator privilege.
• On a Storage Center with Fibre Channel IO ports, configure Fibre Channel zoning before starting this procedure.

About this task

NOTE: This wizard does not support servers connected to the Storage Center over SAS.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab, click Servers.
3. Click Create Server from a VMware vSpehere or vCenter.
The Set Up VMware Host on Storage Center wizard appears.
4. Enter the IP address or hostname, the user name and password. Then click Next.

Storage Center Server Administration 85

 • If the Storage Center has iSCSI ports and the host is not connected to any interface, the Log into Storage Center via
iSCSI page appears. Select the target fault domains, and then click Log In.
• In all other cases, the Verify vCenters Information page appears. Proceed to the next step.
5. Select an available port, and then click Create Servers.
The server definition is created on the Storage Center.
6. The Host Setup Successful page displays the best practices that were set by the wizard and best practices that were not set.
Make a note of any best practices that were not set by the wizard. It is recommended that these updates are applied manually
before starting IO to the Storage Center.
7. (Optional) Place a check next to Create a Volume for this host to create a volume after finishing host setup.
8. Click Finish.

Modifying Servers
Modify a server to change its attributes, apply a Snapshot Profile, and add or remove HBAs.

Apply One or More Snapshot Profiles to a Server

Associate a Snapshot Profile with a server to add snapshot creation and expiration schedules to all volumes that are currently
mapped to a server. Volumes that are subsequently mapped to the server do not inherit the snapshot creation and expiration
schedules.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. Select the server in the Storage tab navigation pane.
3. In the right pane, click Apply Snapshot Profiles to Server. The Apply to Server dialog box opens.
4. Select the Snapshot Profiles to assign to the server from the top pane of the dialog box.
5. To remove existing Snapshot Profiles from each volume mapped to the server, select Replace existing Snapshot Profiles.
6. When you are finished, click OK.

Add a Server to a Server Cluster

You can add a server object to a server cluster at any time.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the server you want to add to a cluster.
3. In the right pane, click Add Server to Cluster. The Add Server to Cluster dialog box opens.
4. Select the server cluster to which you want to add the server and click OK.

Remove a Server from a Server Cluster

You can remove a server object from a server cluster at any time.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. Select the server to remove in the Storage tab navigation pane.
3. In the right pane, click Remove Server from Cluster. The Remove Server from Cluster dialog box opens.
4. Click OK.
5. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the server you want to add to a cluster.ct the server in the Storage tab navigation
pane.

Convert a Physical Server to a Virtual Server

If you migrated a physical server to a virtual machine, change the physical server object to a virtual server object and select the host
physical server.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. Select the server in the Storage tab navigation pane.

86 Storage Center Server Administration

3. In the right pane, click Convert to Virtual Server. The Convert to Virtual Server dialog box opens.
4. Select the server or server cluster that hosts the virtual server, then click OK.

Convert a Virtual Server to a Physical Server

If you migrated a virtual machine to a physical server, modify the corresponding virtual server object accordingly.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. Select the server in the Storage tab navigation pane.
3. In the right pane, click Convert to Physical Server. The Convert to Physical Server dialog box appears.
4. Click OK.

Rename a Server
A server object can be renamed at any time, and the name does not need to match the host name or IP address of the server.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. Select the server in the Storage tab navigation pane.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. Enter a name for the server in the Name field.
5. Click OK.

Change the Operating System of a Server

If you installed a new operating system or upgraded the operating system on a server, update the corresponding server object
accordingly.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. Select the server in the Storage tab navigation pane.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. Select the operating system for the server from the Operating System drop-down menu.
5. Click OK.

Move a Server to a Different Server Folder

For convenience, server objects can be organized by folders.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. Select the server in the Storage tab navigation pane.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. Select the folder to which to move the server in the Server Folder navigation tree.
5. Click OK.

Add One or More HBAs to a Server

To map a volume to a server, the Storage Center must be able to communicate with at least one HBA on the server.

1. Make sure the server HBA(s) has connectivity to the Storage Center HBA(s).
• iSCSI – Configure the iSCSI initiator on the server to use the Storage Center HBA(s) as the target.
• Fibre Channel – Configure Fibre Channel zoning to allow the server HBA(s) and Storage Center HBA(s) to communicate.
• SAS (SCv2000 series controllers only) – Directly connect the controller to a server using the SAS front-end connections.
2. Click the Storage tab.
3. Select the server in the Storage tab navigation pane.
4. In the right pane, click Add HBAs to Server. The Add HBAs to Server dialog box opens.
5. Select or define one or more HBAs for the server.

Storage Center Server Administration 87

 • If one or more server HBAs are visible to the Storage Center, select them in the Select HBA(s) to add to server table.
• If a server HBA is not visible to the Storage Center, click Manually Add HBA to define it manually.
NOTE: For SAS front-end ports, use the SAS device name as the world wide name to manually add the HBA.
6. When you are finished, click OK.

Remove One or More HBAs from a Server

If a server HBA has been repurposed and is no longer used to communicate with the Storage Center, remove it from the server
object.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. Select the server in the Storage tab navigation pane.
3. In the right pane, click Remove HBAs from Server. The Remove HBAs from Server dialog box opens.
4. Select the HBAs that you want to remove.
5. When you are finished, click OK. If the HBA is used by one or more mapped volumes, a confirmation dialog box opens.

Figure 13. Remove HBAs from Server Confirmation Dialog Box

6. If a confirmation dialog box opens:

• Click Cancel to keep the HBA.
• Click OK to remove the HBA, which might interfere with the mapped volume.

Mapping Volumes to Servers

Map a volume to a server to allow the server to use the volume for storage.

Map a Volume to a Server

Map an existing volume to a server to allow the server to use it.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. Select the server in the Storage tab navigation pane.
3. In the right pane, click Map Volume to Server. The Map Volume to Server wizard opens.
4. In the Volume navigation tree, select the volume you want to map, then click Next. The wizard advances to the next page.
5. (Optional) Click Advanced Options to configure LUN settings, restrict mapping paths, or present the volume as read-only.
6. When you are done, click Finish.

88 Storage Center Server Administration

Unmap One or More Volumes From a Server
If a server no longer uses a volume, you can unmap the volume from the server.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. Select the server from which to unmap volumes in the Storage tab navigation pane.
3. In the right pane, click Remove Mappings. The Remove Mappings dialog box opens.
4. Select the volumes to unmap from the server.
5. Click OK.

Create a Volume and Map it to a Server

If a server requires additional storage and you do not want to use an existing volume, you can create and map a volume to the
server in a single operation.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. Select the server on which to map a new volume in the Storage tab navigation pane.
3. In the right pane, click Create Volume. The Create Volume dialog box opens.
4. Enter a name for the volume in the Name field.
5. Select a unit of storage from the drop-down menu and enter the size for the volume in the Size field. The available storage
units are kilobytes (KB), megabytes (MB), gigabytes (GB), and terabytes (TB).
6. In the Volume Folder pane, select the parent folder for the volume.
7. (Optional) Configure the remaining volume attributes as needed.
• To schedule snapshot creation and expiration for the volume, apply one or more Snapshot Profiles by clicking Change
across from Snapshot Profiles.
• To configure LUN settings, restrict mapping paths, or present the volume as read-only, click Advanced Mapping.
• If Chargeback is enabled, select the department to charge for storage costs associated with the volume by clicking Change
across from Chargeback Department.
• To disable read cache on the volume, clear the Enabled checkbox next to Read Cache.
• To disable write cache on the volume, clear the Enabled checkbox next to Write Cache.
• Select Enabled across from Compression to enable Data Compression.
• To use specific disk tiers and RAID levels for volume data, select the appropriate Storage Profile from the Storage Profile
drop-down menu. Using the Recommended Storage Profile allows the volume to take full advantage of data progression.
• If more than one Storage Type is defined on the Storage Center, select the Storage Type to provide storage from the
Storage Type drop-down menu.
8. Click OK. The volume is created and mapped to the server.

Related links
Modifying Volumes

Create Multiple Volumes Simultaneously and Map Them to a Server

If a server requires additional storage and you do not want to use existing volumes, you can create and map multiple volumes to the
server in a single operation.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. Select the server on which to map new volumes in the Storage tab navigation pane.
3. In the right pane, click Create Multiple Volumes. The Create Volume dialog box opens.
4. Enter a name for the volume in the Name field.
5. Select a unit of storage from the drop-down menu and enter the size for the volume in the Size field. The available storage
units are kilobytes (KB), megabytes (MB), gigabytes (GB), and terabytes (TB).
6. In the Volume Folder pane, select the parent folder for the volume.
7. (Optional) Configure the remaining volume attributes as needed.

Storage Center Server Administration 89

 • To schedule snapshot creation and expiration for the volume, apply one or more Snapshot Profiles by clicking Change
across from Snapshot Profiles.
• To configure LUN settings, restrict mapping paths, or present the volume as read-only, click Advanced Mapping.
• If Chargeback is enabled, select the department to charge for storage costs associated with the volume by clicking Change
across from Chargeback Department.
• To disable read cache on the volume, clear the Enabled checkbox next to Read Cache.
• To disable write cache on the volume, clear the Enabled checkbox next to Write Cache.
• Select Enabled across from Compression to enable Data Compression.
• To use specific disk tiers and RAID levels for volume data, select the appropriate Storage Profile from the Storage Profile
drop-down menu. Using the Recommended Storage Profile allows the volume to take full advantage of data progression.
• If more than one Storage Type is defined on the Storage Center, select the Storage Type to provide storage from the
Storage Type drop-down menu.
8. Click OK. The Create Multiple Volumes dialog box appears and displays the newly created volume.
9. Use the Create Multiple Volumes dialog box to create additional volumes.
• To manually define another volume, click Add Volume.
• To add a volume based on a previous volume, select the volume from the list and click Add Volume w/ Attributes of
Selected.
• To modify a previous volume, select it from the list and click Edit Volume.
• To remove a previous volume, select it from the list and click Remove Volume.
10. Click OK. The volumes are created and mapped to servers.

Related links
Modifying Volumes

Creating and Managing Server Folders

Use server folders to group and organize servers defined on the Storage Center.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Create a Server Folder

Create a server folder to group servers together.

1. Click the Servers view.

2. Select a server folder in the Servers pane.
3. In the right pane, click Create Server Folder. The Create Server Folder dialog box opens.
4. Enter a name for the folder in the Name field.
5. Select a parent folder for the new folder in the Parent navigation tree.
6. Click OK.

Rename a Server Folder

Select a different name for a server folder.

1. Click the Servers view.

2. In the Servers pane, select the server folder.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Folder dialog box opens.
4. Enter a new name for the folder in the Name field.
5. Click OK.

90 Storage Center Server Administration

Move a Server Folder
Use the Edit Settings dialog box to move a server folder.

1. Click the Servers view.

2. In the Servers pane, select the server folder.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Folder dialog box opens.
4. Select a new parent folder in the Parent navigation tree.
5. Click OK.

Deleting Servers and Server Folders

Delete servers and server folders when they no longer utilize storage on the Storage Center.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Delete a Server
Delete a server if it no longer utilizes storage on the Storage Center. When a server is deleted, all volume mappings to the server are
also deleted.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. Select the server to delete in the Storage tab navigation pane.
3. In the right pane, click Delete. The Delete dialog box opens.
4. Click OK.

Delete a Server Folder

Delete a server folder if it is no longer needed.
Prerequisites
The server folder must be empty.

Steps
1. Click the Servers view.
2. In the Servers pane, select the server folder.
3. In the right pane, click Delete. The Delete Objects dialog box opens.
4. Click OK.

Managing Servers on a Storage Center

Use the Servers subtab of the Storage tab to create and manage server objects for each Storage Center.
Related links
Creating Servers
Modifying Servers
Mapping Volumes to Servers
Creating and Managing Server Folders
Deleting Servers and Server Folders

Storage Center Server Administration 91

92
 6
Storage Center Maintenance
Storage Manager can manage Storage Center settings, users and user groups, and apply settings to multiple Storage Centers.

Managing Storage Center Settings

Storage Manager can manage settings for individual Storage Centers and apply these settings to multiple Storage Centers.
Related links
Viewing and Modifying Storage Center Information
Modifying Storage Center Network Settings
Configuring Storage Center User Preferences
Configuring Storage Center Data Settings
Configuring Storage Center Secure Console Settings
Configuring Storage Center SMTP Settings
Configuring Storage Center SNMP Settings
Configuring Storage Center Time Settings
Configuring Filters to Restrict Administrative Access

Viewing and Modifying Storage Center Information

Storage Manager provides options for changing default properties for each individual Storage Center that is managed by Storage
Manager.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Rename a Storage Center

Rename a Storage Center when the purpose of the Storage Center has changed or the name no longer applies.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the General tab.
3. In the Name field, type a new name.
4. Click OK.

Rename an Individual Controller

The controller name can be changed without affecting the name of the Storage Center.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select the controller.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box appears.
4. In the Name field, type a new name for the controller.
5. Click OK.

Change the Operation Mode of a Storage Center

Change the operation mode of a Storage Center before performing maintenance or install software updates to isolate alerts from
those events.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the General tab.

Storage Center Maintenance 93

3. In the Operation Mode field select Normal, Maintenance, or Install. Selecting Install or Maintenance isolates alerts from those
that would occur during normal operation.
4. Click OK.

View Storage Center License Information

Storage Manager displays Storage Center license information but does not allow you to modify it.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the License tab to display license information.
3. Click OK.

Apply a New License to a Storage Center

If you add applications, or increase the number of disks licensed for your Storage Center, you may need to apply a new license.
Storage Manager supports submitting multiple licences in a zip file.
Prerequisites
• The Storage Center must be added to Storage Manager using a Storage Center user with the Administrator privilege.
• You must be able to access a Storage Center license file from the computer from which you are running the Dell Storage
Manager Client.

About this task

NOTE: Applying the Flex Port license requires the Storage Center to restart. After the restart, Storage Center creates a
fault domain for the flex port.
Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the License tab.
3. Click Submit License File. A dialog box appears.
4. Browse to and select a Storage Center license file, then click Open. The dialog box closes.
5. Click Apply.
6. After the license is applied, click OK.

Modifying Storage Center Network Settings

The shared management IP, controller management interfaces, and iDRAC can be managed using Storage Manager.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Modify the Storage Center Shared Management IP Address(es)

In a dual-controller Storage Center, the shared management IP address is hosted by the leader under normal circumstances. If the
leader fails, the peer takes over the management IP, allowing management access when the normal leader is down. An IPv6
management IP address can also be assigned.
About this task
NOTE: A single-controller Storage Center does not have a shared management IP address by default, but it can be
configured to facilitate a future transition to dual controllers.
Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the General tab.
3. In the Management IPv4 Address field, type an IPv4 address to use as the management IP.
4. (Optional) In the IPv6 Management IP field, type an IPv6 address to use as the management IP.
5. Click OK.

94 Storage Center Maintenance

Modify Management Interface Settings for a Controller
The IP address, net mask, and gateway can be modified for the controller management interface.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select the controller.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box appears.
4. Modify the management interface settings.
a. In the IP Address field, type a new IP address for the controller management interface.
b. In the IP Net Mask field, type a network mask for the controller management interface.
c. In the IP Gateway field, type the default route for the network.
5. Click OK.

Modify DNS Settings for a Controller

Storage Manager allows you to specify a primary DNS server, secondary DNS server, and the name of the domain to which the
Storage Center belongs.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select the controller.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box appears.
4. Modify the DNS settings.
a. In the DNS Server field, type the IP address of a DNS server on the network.
b. (Optional) In the Secondary DNS Server field, type the IP address of a backup DNS server on the network.
c. In the Domain Name field, type the name of the domain to which the Storage Center belongs.
5. Click OK.

Modify iDRAC Interface Settings for a Controller

The iDRAC interface provides out-of-band management for the controller. When you reach the Configuration Complete screen:

1. Scroll down to Advanced Steps.

2. Click the Modify BMC Settings link.
3. The Edit BMC Settings dialog box opens.
4. Specify the iDRAC interface settings for the bottom controller and the top controller.
a. In the BMC IP Address field, type an IP address for the iDRAC interface.
b. In the BMC Net Mask field, type the network mask.
c. In the BMC Gateway IPv4 Address field, type the default route for the iDRAC.
5. Click OK.

Configuring Storage Center User Preferences

Storage Center user preferences establish defaults for the Storage Center user account that was used to add the Storage Center
to Storage Manager. Storage Manager honors these preferences.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Set the Default Size for New Volumes

The default volume size is used when a new volume is created unless the user specifies a different value.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Preferences tab.
3. In the Volume Size field, type a default size for new volumes in kilobytes (KB), megabytes (MB), gigabytes (GB), or terabytes
(TB).
4. Click OK.

Storage Center Maintenance 95

Set the Default Base Volume Name for New Volumes
The default base name is used as the name for a new volume unless the user specifies a different name. If one or volumes with the
base name already exist, a number is appended to the base name to create the new volume name.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Preferences tab.
3. In the Base Volume Name field, type a name to use as a base for new volumes. The default base is New Volume.
4. Click OK.

Set Default Data Reduction Settings for New Volumes

The default data reduction settings are used when a new volume is created unless the user changes them. You can prevent the
default data reduction settings from being changed during volume creation by clearing the Allow Data Reduction Selection check
box.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Preferences tab.
3. Configure data reduction defaults.
• In the Data Reduction Profile drop-down menu, set the data reduction profile default for new volumes.
• Select the Allow Data Reduction Selection check box to allow users to enable or disable data reduction when creating
volumes.
4. Click OK.

Set Default Cache Settings for New Volumes

The default cache settings are used when a new volume is created unless the user changes them. You can prevent the default
cache settings from being changed during volume creation by clearing the Allow Cache Selection check box.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Preferences tab.
3. Select or clear the Read Cache and Write Cache check boxes to set the default cache settings for new volumes.
4. Select or clear the Allow Cache Selection check box to allow or prevent users from configuring cache settings when creating
volumes.
5. Click OK.

Set the Default Snapshot Options for New Volumes

The default snapshot options are used when a new volume is created unless the user changes them.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Preferences tab.
3. Choose default Snapshot Profiles.
a. In the Snapshot area, click Change. The Select Snapshot Profiles dialog box appears.
b. In the top pane, select the Snapshot Profiles to assign to new volumes by default.
c. Click OK. The Select Snapshot Profiles dialog box closes.
4. In the Minimum Snapshot Interval field, the number of minutes that must pass after a snapshot is taken before a subsequent
snapshot can be taken.
5. Click OK.

Allow or Disallow Advanced Volume Mapping Settings

Advanced volume mapping options include LUN configuration, mapping path options, and making the volume read-only.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Preferences tab.
3. Select or clear the Allow Advanced Mapping check box to enable or disable advanced volume mapping options.

96 Storage Center Maintenance

4. Click OK.

Set the Default Operating System for New Servers

The default operating system is used for new servers unless the user selects a different option. For convenience, choose the
operating system that is most common in your environment.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Preferences tab.
3. From the Operating System drop-down menu, select the default operating system for new servers.
4. Click OK.

Set the Default Storage Profile for New Volumes

The default Storage Profile is used when a new volume is created unless the user selects a different Storage Profile. You can
prevent the Storage Profile from being changed during volume creation by clearing the Allow Storage Profile Selection check box.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Preferences tab.
3. From the Storage Profile drop-down menu, select the Storage Profile to use as the default for new volumes.
4. To allow users to select a Storage Profile when creating a volume, select Allow Storage Profile Selection.
5. Click OK.

Set the Default Storage Type for New Volumes

The default Storage Type is used when a new volume is created unless the user selects a different Storage Type. You can prevent
the Storage Type from being changed during volume creation by clearing the Allow Storage Type Selection check box.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Preferences tab.
3. From the Storage Type drop-down menu, select the Storage Type to use as the default for new volumes.
4. To allow users to select a Storage Type when creating a volume, select Allow Storage Type selection.
5. Click OK.

Configure Dell Storage Manager Client User Settings

The Edit User Setting dialog box includes options for modifying how the Dell Storage Manager Client displays and interacts with
storage data.

Specify How to Display Storage Units

Storage units can be shown in megabytes, gigabytes, terabytes, or an automatically chosen unit of measure that best fits the data.

1. In the top pane of the Dell Storage Manager Client, click Edit User Settings. The Edit User Settings dialog box opens.
2. On the General tab, select how to display the storage units from the Storage Units Formatting drop-down menu:
• Automatic – The units that are most appropriate for the displayed values are automatically selected.
• Always show in MB – All storage units are displayed in megabytes.
• Always show in GB – All storage units are displayed in gigabytes.
• Always show in TB – All storage units are displayed in terabytes.
3. Click OK to save changes and close the Edit User Settings dialog box.

Change the Warning Percentage Threshold

The warning percentage threshold specifies the utilization percentage at which storage objects indicate a warning.

1. In the top pane of the Dell Storage Manager Client, click Edit User Settings. The Edit User Settings dialog box opens.
2. On the General tab, enter a new utilization percentage at which storage objects indicate a warning in the Warning Percentage
Threshold field.

Storage Center Maintenance 97

3. Click OK to save changes and close the Edit User Settings dialog box.

Change the Error Percentage Threshold

The error percentage threshold specifies the utilization percentage at which storage objects indicate an error.

1. In the top pane of the Dell Storage Manager Client, click Edit User Settings. The Edit User Settings dialog box opens.
2. On the General tab, enter a new utilization percentage at which storage objects indicate an error in the Error Percentage
Threshold field.
3. Click OK to save changes and close the Edit User Settings dialog box.

Configuring Storage Center Data Settings

You can configure cache, Data Progression, snapshot, and RAID stripe width settings for the Storage Center.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Set Storage Center Cache Options

Global Storage Center cache settings override cache settings for individual volumes. Read cache improves read performance by
anticipating the next read and holding it in volatile memory. Write cache increases write performance by holding written data in
volatile memory until it can be safely stored on disk.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Storage tab.
3. Select or clear the Read Cache Enabled and Write Cache Enabled check boxes.
4. Click OK.

Schedule or Limit Data Progression

Schedule when Data Progression runs and limit how long it is allowed to run.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Storage tab.
3. In the Data Progression Start Time field, select or type the time at which Data Progression starts running daily.
4. From the Data Progression Max Run Time drop-down menu, select the maximum time period that Data Progression is allowed
to run.
5. Click OK.

Set RAID Stripe Width

The RAID stripe width controls the number of disks across which RAID data is striped. The stripe widths for RAID 5 and RAID 6 are
independently configured.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Storage tab.
3. From the RAID 5 Stripe Width drop-down menu, select a stripe width of 5 or 9 disks.
4. From the RAID 6 Stripe Width drop-down menu, select a stripe width of 6 or 10 disks.
5. Click OK.

Configure an iSNS Server

Set the host name or IP address of the Internet Storage Name Service (iSNS) server on your network.
Prerequisites
The Storage Center must be added to Storage Manager using a Storage Center user with the Administrator privilege.

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Storage tab.

98 Storage Center Maintenance

3. In the iSNS Server Host or IP Address field, type the host name or IP address of an iSNS server that provides name services
for initiators and targets on your network.
4. Click OK.

Configuring Storage Center Secure Console Settings

The secure console allows support personnel to access the Storage Center console without connecting through the serial port.
NOTE: Do not modify the secure console configuration without the assistance of Dell Technical Support.

Enable Secure Console Access

Enable the secure console to allow support personnel to access the Storage Center console without connecting through the serial
port.
Prerequisites
The Storage Center must be added to Storage Manager using a Storage Center user with the Administrator privilege.

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Secure Console tab.
3. Select the Enable secure console access check box.
4. In the Reservation Server Host or IP Address (Storage Center 6.6 or later) or Secure Console Server Host or IP Address
field (Storage Center 6.5 or earlier), type the host name or IP address of a secure console server provided by Dell Technical
Support.
5. In the Session Time to Live field (Storage Center 6.6 or later), enter the time, in minutes, hours, or days, to keep the session
active.
NOTE: The maximum time to live is 72 hours.
6. If a SOCKS proxy is required to allow the Storage Center to communicate with the secure console server specified in the
previous step, configure the Proxy Settings.
a. From the Proxy Type drop-down menu, select SOCKS4 or SOCKS5.
b. In the IP Address field, type the IP address of the proxy server.
c. In the Port field, type the port used by the proxy server.
d. If the proxy server requires authentication, complete the User Name and Password fields.
7. Click OK.

Restart the Storage Center Secure Console Server

Troubleshooting an issue may require restarting the secure console server.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Secure Console tab.
3. Click Restart Service. A confirmation dialog box appears.
4. Click OK to confirm.
5. Click OK.

Configuring Storage Center SMTP Settings

SMTP server settings can be configured individually for each Storage Center or applied to multiple Storage Centers.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Storage Center Maintenance 99

Configure Storage Center SMTP Server Settings
Configure SMTP settings to allow the Storage Center to send alert message emails to users who have specified a recipient address
in their contact properties.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the SMTP Server tab.
3. Configure the SMTP server settings.
a. Select the Enable SMTP Email check box.
b. In the SMTP Mail Server field, enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the SMTP email server. Click Test
Server to verify connectivity to the SMTP server.
c. (Optional) In the Backup SMTP Server field, enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of a backup SMTP email
server. Click Test Server to verify connectivity to the SMTP server.
d. If the SMTP server requires emails to contain a MAIL FROM address, specify an email address in the Sender Email
Address field.
e. (Optional) In the Common Subject Line field, enter a subject line to use for all emails sent by the Storage Center.
f. Configure how the Storage Center identifies itself to the SMTP server:
• To use SMTP, type the Storage Center fully qualified domain name in the Hello Message (HELO) field.
• To use ESMTP, select the Send Extended Hello (EHLO) check box, then type the Storage Center fully qualified
domain name in the Extended Hello Message (EHLO) field.
g. If the SMTP server requires clients to authenticate before sending email, select the Use Authorized Login (AUTH LOGIN)
check box, then type a user name and password in the Login ID and Password fields.
4. Click OK.

Configuring Storage Center SNMP Settings

SNMP allows the Storage Center to be monitored over the network.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Configure SNMP Settings for a Storage Center (Storage Center 6.7 and Earlier)
Configure SNMP if you want to monitor the Storage Center with a network management system.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the SNMP Server tab.
3. Set the community strings that allow access to the Storage Center SNMP agent.
a. In the Read Only Community String field, type a password for allowing network management systems to read from the
Storage Center SNMP agent.
b. In the Read Write Community String field, type a password for allowing network management systems to read from or
write to the Storage Center SNMP agent.
4. If the Agent Running status is Not Running, click Start Agent.
5. If the Storage Center supports SNMP v1 or v2, specify settings for the network management system to which Storage Center
will send SNMP traps.
a. In the Trap Community String field, type a password used to allow the Storage Center SNMP agent to communicate with
the Network Management System.
b. In the Trap Destination field, type host name or IP address of the Network Management System that is collecting trap
information.
c. From the Trap Type drop-down menu, select the trap type to use.
d. Click Start Trap.
6. When you are finished, click OK.

100 Storage Center Maintenance

Configuring Storage Center Time Settings
Date and time settings can be configured individually for each Storage Center or applied to multiple Storage Centers.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Set the Date and Time for a Storage Center

Select the time zone, then set the date and time or configure the Storage Center to synchronize with an NTP server.
Prerequisites
The Storage Center must be added to Storage Manager using a Storage Center user with the Administrator privilege.

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Time Settings tab.
3. From the Region drop-down menu, select the region where the Storage Center is located.
4. From the Time Zone drop-down menu, select the time zone where the Storage Center is located.
5. Set the date and time.
• To set the date and time manually, make sure the Use NTP Server check box is cleared, then set the date and time in the
Current Time fields.
• To configure the Storage Center to synchronize the date and time with a Network Time Protocol server, select the Use
NTP Server check box, then type the host name or IP address of an NTP server in the Server Host or IP Address field.
6. Click OK.

Configuring Filters to Restrict Administrative Access

Access filters can be created to selectively allow administrative access to a Storage Center based on IP address, user privilege level,
or user name. When one or more access filters are defined, administrative connections that do not match an access filter are
denied.

• Storage Manager does not allow you to create an access filter policy that would reject your current administrative connection.
• Access filters apply to new administrative connections only; existing administrative connections are not affected.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Create an Access Filter for a Storage Center

Create an access filter to explicitly allow administrative connections from a user privilege level, specific user, IP address, or range of
IP addresses.
Prerequisites
The Storage Center must be added to Storage Manager using a Storage Center user with the Administrator privilege.

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the IP Filtering tab.
3. Click Create Filter. The Create IP Filter dialog box opens.
4. Select the Storage Center user or user privilege level to allow.
• To allow access to a Storage Center user privilege level, select User Privilege Level, then select a privilege level from the
drop-down menu.
• To allow access to an individual Storage Center user, select Specific User, then select a user from the drop-down menu.
5. Specify which source IP addresses to allow.
NOTE: If network address translation (NAT) is enabled in your network environment, be sure to specify the IP
address(es) visible to the Storage Center.
• To allow all source IP addresses, select All Hosts.

Storage Center Maintenance 101

 • To allow access to a specific IP address, select Single IP Address, then type the IP address in the field.
• To allow access to a range of IP addresses, select Range of IP Addresses, then type the first and last IP addresses in the
fields.
6. When you are finished, click OK.

Modify an Access Filter for a Storage Center

Modify an access filter to change the users or IP addresses it allows.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the IP Filtering tab.
3. Select the access filter that you want to modify, then click Modify Filter. The Modify IP Filter dialog box appears.
4. Modify the access filter settings as needed. For user interface reference information, click Help.
5. (Optional) Modify the allowed Storage Center user or user privilege level.
• To allow access to a Storage Center user privilege level, select User Privilege Level, then select a privilege level from the
drop-down menu.
• To allow access to an individual Storage Center user, select Specific User, then select a user from the drop-down menu.
6. (Optional) Modify the allowed source IP addresses.
NOTE: If network address translation (NAT) is enabled in your network environment, be sure to specify the IP
address(es) visible to the Storage Center.
• To allow all source IP addresses, select All Hosts.
• To allow access to a specific IP address, select Single IP Address, then type the IP address in the field.
• To allow access to a range of IP addresses, select Range of IP Addresses, then type the first and last IP addresses in the
fields.
7. When you are finished, click OK.

Delete an Access Filter for a Storage Center

Delete an access filter if it is no longer needed or you want to revoke administrative access to the users and IP addresses that the
filter matches.
Prerequisites
The Storage Center must be added to Storage Manager using a Storage Center user with the Administrator privilege.

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the IP Filtering tab.
3. Select the access filter that you want to delete, then click Delete Filter. The Delete IP Filter dialog box opens.
4. Click OK to confirm deletion, then click OK to close the Edit Settings dialog box.

View and Delete Access Violations for a Storage Center

View access violations to determine who has unsuccessfully attempted to log in. A maximum of 100 access violations are recorded
and displayed for a Storage Center.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the IP Filtering tab.
3. Click Show Access Violations. The Show Access Violations dialog box appears.
4. (Optional) Delete access violations.
a. Select the corresponding check box for each violation that you want to delete.
b. Click Delete Selected Violations. A confirmation dialog box opens.
c. Click OK to close the confirmation dialog box, then click OK to close the Show Access Violations dialog box.
5. Click OK to close the Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box.

102 Storage Center Maintenance

Managing Storage Center Users and Groups
Storage Center users have access to folders, volumes, views, and commands depending on their privilege level and the user groups
to which they belong. User accounts can be created locally and/or exist externally in a directory service.

User Privilege Levels

Each user is assigned a single privilege level. Storage Center has three levels of user privilege.

Privilege Level Allowed Access

Administrator Read and write access to the entire Storage Center (no
restrictions). All Administrators have the same predefined
privileges. Only Administrators can manage users and user
groups.
Volume Manager Read and write access to the folders associated with the
assigned user groups. Users with this privilege level can create
volumes in the allowed volume folders and map them to existing
servers in the allowed server folders.
Reporter Read-only access to the folders associated with the assigned
user group(s).

User Groups
User groups grant access to volume, server, and disk folders.

• Users with the Administrator privilege have access to all folders and cannot be added to user groups.
• Users with the Volume Manager or Reporter privilege must be associated with one or more user groups, and can access only the
volume, server, and disk folders made available to them.

User Account Management and Authentication

Storage Center access is granted using either of the following methods:

• Local users and user groups: User accounts can be created and maintained on the Storage Center.
• External directory service: In environments that use Active Directory or OpenLDAP, Storage Center can authenticate directory
users. Access can be granted to individual directory users and directory user groups. These users access the Storage Center
using their domain credentials.

Discover Directory Service Settings Automatically (Storage Center 6.6 or Later Only)
Use the Configure Directory Service Automatic Discovery wizard to allow the Storage Center to discover available directory
services automatically.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Directory Services tab.
3. Click Configure Directory Services Automatic Discovery.
The Storage Center automatically discovers directory server settings and displays the settings in the Configure Directory
Service Automatic Discovery wizard.
4. (Optional) Clear the check box next to any setting you want to change, and then type a new value into that field.
• In the URI field, type the uniform resource identifier (URI) for one or more servers to which Storage Center connects.

NOTE: Use the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the servers.

Example URIs for two servers:

Storage Center Maintenance 103

 ldap://server1.example.com ldap://server2.example.com:1234

NOTE: Adding multiple servers ensures continued authorization of users in the event of a resource outage. If
Storage Center cannot establish contact with the first server, Storage Center attempts to connect to the
remaining servers in the order listed.
• In the Directory Server Connection Timeout field, enter the maximum time (in minutes) that Storage Center waits while
attempting to connect to an Active Directory server. This value must be greater than zero.
• In the Base DN field, type the base distinguished name for the LDAP server. The Base DN is the starting point when
searching for users.
• In the Storage Center Hostname field, type the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the Storage Center.

– For a single-controller Storage Center system, this is the fully qualified host name for the controller IP address.
– For a dual-controller Storage Center system, this is the fully qualified host name for the management IP address.
• In the LDAP Domain field, type the LDAP domain to search.
5. (Optional) Click Test Server to verify that the Storage Center can communicate with the specified directory servers using the
selected protocol.
6. (Optional) If Transport Layer Security (TLS) is enabled, upload a Certificate Authority PEM file.
a. Click Upload Certificate Authority PEM.
b. Browse to the location of the PEM file, select the file, and click Open. The Upload TLS Certificate dialog box opens.
NOTE: If you select the wrong PEM file, click Upload Certificate in the Upload TLS Certificate dialog box to
select a new file.
c. Click OK to upload the certificate.
7. Click Next. The Kerberos Settings page opens.
8. (Optional) Select the Enabled check box to enable Kerberos authentication.
9. To change any of the Kerberos settings, clear the Auto-Discover check box, and then type a new value into that field.
• Kerberos Domain Realm: Kerberos domain realm to authenticate against. In Windows networks, this is the domain name in
uppercase characters.
• KDC Hostname or IP Address: Fully qualified domain name (FQDN) or IP address of the Key Distribution Center (KDC) to
which Storage Center will connect.
• Password Renew Rate (Days): Number of days before the keytab is regenerated. The default value is 0, which equates to
a password renew rate of 14 days.
10. Click Next. The Join Domain page opens.
11. Enter the user name and password of a domain administrator.
12. Click Next. The Summary page opens.
13. If you want to change any setting, click Back to return to the previous page. When all settings are correct, click Finish.

Configure Directory Services Manually (Storage Center 6.6 or Later Only)

Use the Directory Service Manual Configuration wizard to enter directory service settings manually. Use manual configuration for
OpenLDAP or special Active Directory sites.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Directory Services tab.
3. Click Configure Directory Services Manually.
The Directory Service Manual Configuration wizard opens.
4. From the Directory Type drop-down menu, select Active Directory or OpenLDAP.
5. Enter the settings for the directory server.
• In the URI field, type the uniform resource identifier (URI) for one or more servers to which Storage Center connects.

NOTE: Use the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the servers.

Example URIs for two servers:

104 Storage Center Maintenance

 ldap://server1.example.com ldap://server2.example.com:1234

NOTE: Adding multiple servers ensures continued authorization of users in the event of a resource outage. If
Storage Center cannot establish contact with the first server, Storage Center attempts to connect to the
remaining servers in the order listed.
• In the Base DN field, type the base distinguished name for the LDAP server. The Base DN is the starting point when
searching for users.
• In the Relative Base field, type the Relative Base information. A Relative Base is a list of Relative Distinguished Names
(RDN) prepended to the Base DN, indicating where the controller should be joined to the domain. An RDN contains an
attribute and a value, such as:

OU=SAN Controllers

OU is the attribute, and SAN Controllers is the value.

The following special characters used within an RDN value must be escaped using a backslash:

, + " \ < > ; = / CR and LF

For example:

Relative Base: OU=SAN Controllers

(No escapes necessary)
Relative Base: OU=SAN\+Controllers
(The plus character is escaped)
Relative Base: OU=Buildings A\,B\,C,OU=SAN \+Controllers
(Commas and plus sign are escaped except for the comma
separating the RDNs.)
• In the Storage Center Hostname field, type the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the Storage Center.

– For a single-controller Storage Center system, this is the fully qualified host name for the controller IP address.
– For a dual-controller Storage Center system, this is the fully qualified host name for the management IP address.
• In the LDAP Domain field, type the LDAP domain to search.
• In the Authentication Bind DN field, type the Distinguished Name or User Principal Name of the user that the Storage
Center uses to connect to and search the LDAP server.
• In the Authentication Bind Password field, type the password for the authentication bind Distinguished Name.
6. (Optional) Click Test Server to verify that the Storage Center can communicate with the specified directory server(s) using
the selected protocol.
7. (Optional) If Transport Layer Security (TLS) is enabled, upload a Certificate Authority PEM file.
a. Click Upload Certificate.
b. Browse to the location of the PEM file, select the file, and click Open. The Upload TLS Certificate dialog box opens.
c. Click OK to upload the certificate.
8. Click Next. The Join Domain page opens.
9. Enter the user name and password of a domain administrator.
10. Click Next. The Summary page opens.
11. If you want to change any setting, click Back to return to the previous page. When all settings are correct, click Finish.

Managing Local Storage Center Users

Storage Manager can create, manage, and delete local Storage Center users.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Storage Center Maintenance 105

Create a Local Storage Center User
Create a local Storage Center user to assign privileges to a new user.
Prerequisites
The Storage Center must be added to Storage Manager using a Storage Center user with the Administrator privilege.

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Local Users subtab, click Create Local User. The Create Local User dialog box opens.
4. In the Name field, type a name for the user.
NOTE: To avoid user name conflicts with directory service users, do not use the @ or \ characters in local user
names.
5. From the Privilege drop-down menu, select the privilege level to assign to the user.
• Administrator: When selected, the local user has full access to the Storage Center.
• Volume Manager: When selected, the local user has read and write access to volumes, servers, and disks in the folders
associated with the assigned user groups.
• Reporter: When selected, the local user has read-only access to volumes, servers, and disks in the folders associated with
the assigned user groups.
6. (Storage Center 6.7 and below) From the Session Timeout drop-down menu, select the maximum length of time that the local
user can be idle while logged in to the Storage Center System Manager before the connection is terminated.
7. From the Preferred Language drop-down menu, select a language. That language will be used for email alerts.
8. (Volume Manager and Reporter only) Add one or more local user groups to the local user.
a. In the Local User Groups area, click Change. The Select Local User Groups dialog box opens.
b. (Optional) To create a new local user group, click Create Local User Group, then complete the Create Local User Group
wizard. For user interface reference information, click Help.
c. Select the check box for each local user group you want to associate with the local user.
d. When you are finished, click OK. The Select Local User Groups dialog box closes.
9. Specify and confirm a password for the user in the Password and Confirm Password fields.
10. (Optional) Specify more information about the user in the Details area.
11. When you are finished, click OK. The Create Local User dialog box closes.
12. Click OK to close the Edit Settings dialog box.

Configure the Default User Preferences for New Storage Center Users
The default user preferences are applied to new Storage Center users. The preferences can be individually customized further after
the user is created.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Local Users subtab, click Configure Default User Preferences. The Configure Default User Preferences dialog box
opens.
4. Modify the user preferences as needed, then click OK.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.
5. When you are finished, click OK. The Configure Default User Preferences dialog box closes.
6. Click OK to close the Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box.

Related links
Configure Preferences for a Local Storage Center User

106 Storage Center Maintenance

Increase the Privilege Level for a Local Storage Center User
The privilege level can be increased for local users that have the Volume Manager or Reporter privilege. The privilege level for a user
cannot be decreased.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Local Users subtab, select the user, then click Edit Settings. The Edit Local User Settings dialog box opens.
4. From the Privilege drop-down menu, select the privilege level to assign to the user.
• Administrator – When selected, the local user has full access to the Storage Center.
• Volume Manager – When selected, the local user has read and write access to the folders associated with the assigned
user groups.
• Reporter – When selected, the local user has read-only access to the folders associated with the assigned user groups.
5. When you are finished, click OK. The local user Edit Local User Settings dialog box closes.
6. Click OK to close the Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box.

Change the Preferred Language for a Storage Center User

The preferred language for a Storage Center user determines the languages used in email alerts from the Storage Center.
Prerequisites
The Storage Center must support the preferred language.
Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Local Users subtab, select the user, then click Edit Settings. The Edit Local User Settings dialog box opens.
4. From the Preferred Language drop-down menu, select a language.
5. Click OK.

Change the Session Timeout for a Local Storage Center User

The session timeout controls the maximum length of time that the local user can be idle while logged in to the Storage Center
System Manager before the connection is terminated.
Prerequisites

• The Storage Center must be running Storage Center OS version 6.7 or below.
• The Storage Center must be added to Storage Manager using a Storage Center user with the Administrator privilege.

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Local Users subtab, select the user, then click Edit Settings. The Edit Local User Settings dialog box opens.
4. From the Session Timeout drop-down menu, select the maximum length of time that the local user can be idle while logged in
to the Storage Center System Manager before the connection is terminated.
5. When you are finished, click OK. The local user Edit Settings dialog box closes.
6. Click OK to close the Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box.

Enable or Disable Access for a Local Storage Center User

When a local Storage Center user is disabled, the user is not allowed to log in.
Prerequisites
The Storage Center must be added to Storage Manager using a Storage Center user with the Administrator privilege.

Storage Center Maintenance 107

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Local Users subtab, select the user, then click Edit Settings. The Edit Local User Settings dialog box opens.
4. Enable or disable access for the local user.
• To enable access, select the Enabled check box.
• To disable access, clear the Enabled check box.
5. When you are finished, click OK. The local user Edit Settings dialog box closes.
6. Click OK to close the Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box.

Modify Local Group Membership for a Local Storage Center User

User groups grant access to volume, server, and disk folders for users with the Volume Manager or Reporter privilege level.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Local Users subtab, select the user, then click Edit Settings. The Edit Local User Settings dialog box opens.
4. Modify local group membership for the user.
a. In the Local User Groups area, click Change. The Select Local User Groups dialog box opens.
b. (Optional) To create a new local user group, click Create Local User Group, then complete the Create Local User Group
wizard. For user interface reference information, click Help.
c. Select the check box for each local user group you want to associate with the local user.
d. To remove the local user from a local group, clear the check box for the group.
e. When you are finished, click OK. The Select Local User Groups dialog box closes.
5. When you are finished, click OK. The Edit Local User Settings dialog box closes.
6. Click OK to close the Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box.

Configure Preferences for a Local Storage Center User

By default, each Storage Center user inherits the default user preferences. If necessary, the preferences can be individually
customized for a user.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Local Users subtab, select the user, then click Edit Settings. The Edit Local User Settings dialog box opens.
4. Click Configure User Preferences. The Configure User Preferences dialog box opens.
5. Modify the user preferences as needed, then click OK.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.
6. When you are finished, click OK. The Edit Local User Settings dialog box closes.
7. Click OK to close the Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box.

Related links
Configure the Default User Preferences for New Storage Center Users

Modify Descriptive Information About a Local Storage Center User

The descriptive information about a local user includes his or her real name, department, title, location, telephone numbers, email
address(es), and notes.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Local Users subtab, select the user, then click Edit Settings. The Edit Local User Settings dialog box opens.
4. Modify the Real Name field as necessary.
5. Modify the fields in the Details area as necessary, then click OK.

108 Storage Center Maintenance

 NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.
6. When you are finished, click OK. The Edit Local User Settings dialog box closes.
7. Click OK to close the Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box.

Change the Password for a Local Storage Center User

Changing the password for a local Storage Center user through Storage Manager automatically updates any Storage Center
mappings that were made using the user’s credentials.
Prerequisites
The Storage Center must be added to Storage Manager using a Storage Center user with the Administrator privilege.

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Local Users subtab, select the user, then click Change Password. The Change Password dialog box opens.
4. Enter the old password.
5. Enter and confirm a new password for the local user, then click OK.

Delete a Local Storage Center User

Delete a Storage Center user if he or she no longer requires access. The local user that was used to add the Storage Center to
Storage Manager cannot be deleted. The last user with the Administrator privilege cannot be deleted because Storage Center
requires at least one Administrator.
Prerequisites
The Storage Center must be added to Storage Manager using a Storage Center user with the Administrator privilege.

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Local Users subtab, select the user, then click Delete. The Delete dialog box opens.
4. Click OK to confirm, then click OK to close the Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box.

Restore a Deleted Local Storage Center User

A new password must be provided when restoring a deleted user. If you are restoring a deleted user with the Volume Manager or
Reporter privilege, the user must be added to one or more local user groups.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Local Users subtab, click Restore Deleted User. The Restore Deleted User wizard opens.
4. Select the local user that you want to restore, then click Next. The wizard advances to the next page.
5. (Volume Manager and Reporter only) Add the local user to one or more local user groups.
a. In the Local User Groups area, click Change. The Select Local User Groups dialog box opens.
b. (Optional) To create a new local user group, click Create Local User Group, then complete the Create Local User Group
wizard. For user interface reference information, click Help.
c. Select the check box for each local user group you want to associate with the local user.
d. When you are finished, click OK. The Select Local User Groups dialog box closes.
6. Enter and confirm a new password for the local user in the New Password and Confirm Password fields.
7. Modify the remaining user settings as needed.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.
8. When you are finished, click Finish to close the wizard, then click OK to close the Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box.

Storage Center Maintenance 109

Managing Local Storage Center User Groups
User groups grant access to volume, server, and disk folders.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Create a Local User Group

Create a local Storage Center user group to grant access to specific volume, server, and disk folders.
Prerequisites
The Storage Center must be added to Storage Manager using a Storage Center user with the Administrator privilege.

About this task

To create a user group:
Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Local User Groups subtab, click Create Local User Group. The Create Local User Group wizard opens.
4. Add volume folders to the local user group.
a. If you need to create a volume folder, click Create Volume Folder, then complete the fields in the Create Volume Folder
dialog box.
b. In the upper table, select the volume folder(s) you want to add to the local user group, then click Add Volume Folders. The
volume folders move from the upper table to the lower table.
c. When you are finished, click Next. The wizard advances to the next page.
5. Add server folders to the local user group.
a. If you need to create a server folder, click Create Server Folder, then complete the fields in the Create Server Folder
dialog box.
b. In the upper table, select the server folder(s) you want to add to the local user group, then click Add Server Folders. The
server folders move from the upper table to the lower table.
c. When you are finished, click Next. The wizard advances to the next page.
6. Add disk folders to the local user group.
a. In the upper table, select the disk folder(s) you want to add to the local user group, then click Add Disk Folders. The disk
folders move from the upper table to the lower table.
b. When you are finished, click Next. The wizard advances to the next page.
7. In the Name field, type a name for the local user group, then click Finish.
8. Click OK to close the Edit Settings dialog box.

Manage User Membership for a Local Storage Center User Group

Local Storage Center users and directory users that have been individually granted access can be added to local Storage Center
user groups.
Prerequisites
The Storage Center must be added to Storage Manager using a Storage Center user with the Administrator privilege.

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Local User Groups subtab, select the local user group, then click Manage Users. The Manage Users dialog box opens.
4. Manage user membership for the user group.
• To add users, select the user(s) you want to add in the upper table, then click Add Users. The users move from the upper
table to the lower table.
• To remove users, select the user(s) you want to remove in the lower table, then click Remove Users. The users move from
the upper table to the lower table.
5. When you are finished, click OK to close the Manage Users dialog box.

110 Storage Center Maintenance

6. Click OK to close the Edit Settings dialog box.

Manage Directory User Group Membership for a Local Storage Center User Group
Add a directory user group to a local user group to grant access to all directory users in the directory user group.
Prerequisites
• The Storage Center must be configured to authenticate users with an external directory service.
• The directory user group(s) you want to add to a local Storage Center user group must have been granted Volume Manager or
Reporter access to the Storage Center.
• The Storage Center must be added to Storage Manager using a Storage Center user with the Administrator privilege.

Steps
1. Click the Storage view.
2. In the Storage pane, select the Storage Center.
3. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box appears.
4. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
5. On the Local User Groups subtab, select the local user group, then click Manage Directory User Groups. The Manage
Directory User Groups dialog box appears.
6. Manage directory user group membership for the user group.
• To add directory user groups, select the directory user group(s) you want to add in the upper table, then click Add
Directory User Groups. The directory user group(s) move from the upper table to the lower table.
• To remove directory user groups, select the directory user group(s) you want to remove in the lower table, then click
Remove Directory User Groups. The directory user groups move from the upper table to the lower table.
7. When you are finished, click OK to close the Manage Directory User Groups dialog box.
8. Click OK to close the Edit Settings dialog box.

Manage Folder Access Granted by a Local Storage Center User Group

The folders that are associated with a local Storage Center user group determine the access that is granted by the user group.
Prerequisites
The Storage Center must be added to Storage Manager using a Storage Center user with the Administrator privilege.

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Local User Groups subtab, select the local user group, then click Manage Folders. The Manage Folders dialog box
opens.
4. Manage volume folders for the local user group.
a. If you need to create a volume folder, click Create Volume Folder, then complete the fields in the Create Volume Folder
dialog box.
b. To add a volume folder, select the volume folder(s) you want to add in the upper table, then click Add Volume Folders. The
volume folders move from the upper table to the lower table.
c. To remove a volume folder, select the volume folder(s) you want to remove from the local user group in the lower table,
then click Remove Volume Folders. The volume folders move from the lower table to the upper table.
d. When you are finished, click Next. The wizard advances to the next page.
5. Manage server folders for the local user group.
a. If you need to create a server folder, click Create Server Folder, then complete the fields in the Create Server Folder
dialog box.
b. To add a server folder, select the server folder(s) you want to add in the upper table, then click Add Server Folders. The
server folders move from the upper table to the lower table.
c. To remove a server folder, select the server folder(s) you want to remove from the local user group in the lower table, then
click Remove Server Folders. The server folders move from the lower table to the upper table.
d. When you are finished, click Next. The wizard advances to the next page.
6. Manage disk folders for the local user group.

Storage Center Maintenance 111

 a. Add or remove a disk folder.
• To add a disk folder, select the disk folder(s) you want to add in the upper table, then click Add Disk Folders. The disk
folders move from the upper table to the lower table.
• To remove a disk folder, select the disk folder(s) you want to remove from the local user group in the lower table, then
click Remove Disk Folders. The disk folders move from the lower table to the upper table.
b. When you are done, click Finish. The wizard closes.
7. Click OK to close the Edit Settings dialog box.

Delete a Local Storage Center User Group

Delete a local Storage Center user group if it is no longer needed.
Prerequisites
The Storage Center must be added to Storage Manager using a Storage Center user with the Administrator privilege.

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Local User Groups subtab, select the local user group, then click Delete. The Delete dialog box opens.
4. Click OK to confirm deletion, then click OK to close the Edit Settings dialog box.

Enabling Directory Services Authentication

Before you can grant Storage Center access to directory users and directory user groups, you must first configure Storage Center
to communicate with one or more Active Directory/OpenLDAP servers. If you use Kerberos authentication, you must also configure
Storage Center to communicate with the Kerberos Key Distribution Center (KDC).
• An Active Directory or OpenLDAP directory service must be deployed in your environment.
• Storage Center must have network connectivity to the directory service.
• You must be familiar with the Active Directory/OpenLDAP configuration of the directory service.
• Storage Center requires credentials from a directory service user that is allowed to query the directory service and who has
sufficient privileges to perform a bind operation.
• (Active Directory only) Joining the controller to the domain requires credentials from a directory service user who is an
administrator and who has sufficient privileges to create a computer record in the directory.
• (Active Directory only) To join the controller to the domain, forward and reverse DNS records for the Storage Center must be
created in the domain. For a single-controller Storage Center system, create DNS records for the controller IP address. For a
dual-controller Storage Center system, create DNS records for the management IP address.
• (OpenLDAP only) To use password authentication with OpenLDAP, an SSL certificate is required to communicate with the
directory service using SSL/TLS.

Managing Directory Service Users

Directory service users can be individually granted access to a Storage Center.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Grant Access to a Directory User

Grant access to a directory user to allow the user to log in to the Storage Center using his or her directory credentials.
Prerequisites
• The Storage Center must be configured to authenticate users with an external directory service.

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Directory Users subtab, click Actions → Grant Access to Directory User. The Grant Access to Directory User dialog
box opens.
4. In the Name field, type the directory user name assigned to the user. The following formats are supported:

112 Storage Center Maintenance

 • username@domain
• domain\username
5. In the Distinguished Name field, type the distinguished name for the user.
Example: CN=Firstname Lastname,CN=Users,DC=example,DC=com
6. From the Privilege drop-down menu, select the privilege level to assign to the user.
• Administrator: When selected, the local user has full access to the Storage Center.
• Volume Manager: When selected, the local user has read and write access to the folders associated with the assigned user
groups.
• Reporter: When selected, the local user has read-only access to the folders associated with the assigned user groups.
7. (Storage Center version 6.7 and below) From the Session Timeout drop-down menu, select the maximum length of time that
the local user can be idle while logged in to the Storage Center System Manager before the connection is terminated.
8. (Volume Manager and Reporter only) Add one or more local user groups to the local user.
a. In the Local User Groups area, click Change. The Select Local User Groups dialog box appears.
b. (Optional) To create a new local user group, click Create Local User Group, then complete the Create Local User Group
wizard. For user interface reference information, click Help.
c. Select the check box for each local user group you want to associate with the local user.
d. When you are finished, click OK. The Select Local User Groups dialog box closes.
9. (Optional) Specify more information about the user in the Details area. For user interface reference information, click Help.
10. When you are finished, click OK. The Grant Access to Directory User dialog box closes.
11. Click OK to close the Edit Settings dialog box.

Increase the Privilege Level for a Directory Service User

The privilege level can be increased for directory service users that have the Volume Manager or Reporter privilege. The privilege
level for a user cannot be decreased.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Directory Users subtab, select the user, then click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. From the Privilege drop-down menu, select the privilege level to assign to the user.
• Administrator – When selected, the local user has full access to the Storage Center.
• Volume Manager – When selected, the local user has read and write access to the folders associated with the assigned
user groups.
• Reporter – When selected, the local user has read-only access to the folders associated with the assigned user groups.
5. When you are finished, click OK. The local user Edit Settings dialog box closes.
6. Click OK to close the Storage Center Edit Settings dialog box.

Change the Session Timeout for a Directory Service User

The session timeout controls the maximum length of time that the local user can be idle while logged in to the Storage Center
System Manager before the connection is terminated.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Directory Users subtab, select the user, then click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. From the Session Timeout drop-down menu, select the maximum length of time that the local user can be idle while logged in
to the Storage Center System Manager before the connection is terminated.
5. When you are finished, click OK. The local user Edit Settings dialog box closes.
6. Click OK to close the Storage Center Edit Settings dialog box.

Storage Center Maintenance 113

Enable or Disable Access for a Directory Service User
When a directory service user is disabled, the user is not allowed to log in.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Directory Users subtab, select the user, then click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box appears.
4. Enable or disable access for the directory service user.
• To enable access, select the Enabled check box.
• To disable access, clear the Enabled check box.
5. When you are finished, click OK. The local user Edit Settings dialog box closes.
6. Click OK to close the Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box.

Modify Local Group Membership for a Directory Service User

User groups grant access to volume, server, and disk folders for users with the Volume Manager or Reporter privilege level.
Prerequisites
• The directory service user must have been individually granted access to the Storage Center. Users that have been granted
access based on a directory group inherit local group membership from the directory group settings.

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Directory Users subtab, select the user, then click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. Modify local group membership for the user.
a. In the Local User Groups area, click Change. The Select Local User Groups dialog box opens.
b. (Optional) To create a new local user group, click Create Local User Group, then complete the Create Local User Group
wizard. For user interface reference information, click Help.
c. Select the check box for each local user group you want to associate with the local user.
d. To remove the local user from a local group, clear the check box for the group.
e. When you are finished, click OK. The Select Local User Groups dialog box closes.
5. When you are finished, click OK. The local user Edit Settings dialog box closes.
6. Click OK to close the Storage Center Edit Settings dialog box.

Configure Preferences for a Directory Service User

By default, each Storage Center user inherits the default user preferences. If necessary, the preferences can be individually
customized for a user.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Directory Users subtab, select the user, then click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. Click Configure User Preferences. The Configure User Preferences dialog box opens.
5. Modify the user preferences as needed, then click OK.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.
6. When you are finished, click OK. The local user Edit Settings dialog box closes.
7. Click OK to close the Storage Center Edit Settings dialog box.

114 Storage Center Maintenance

Modify Descriptive Information About a Directory Service User
The descriptive information about a local user includes his or her real name, department, title, location, telephone numbers, email
address(es), and notes.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Directory Users subtab, select the user, then click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. Click Configure User Preferences. The Configure User Preferences dialog box opens.
5. Modify the Real Name field as necessary.
6. Modify the fields in the Details area as necessary, then click OK.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.
7. When you are finished, click OK. The local user Edit Settings dialog box closes.
8. Click OK to close the Storage Center Edit Settings dialog box.

Delete a Directory Service User

Delete a directory service user if he or she no longer requires access. The user that was used to add the Storage Center to Storage
Manager cannot be deleted. The last user with the Administrator privilege cannot be deleted because Storage Center requires at
least one Administrator.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Directory Users subtab, select the user, then click Delete. The Delete dialog box opens.
4. Click OK to confirm, then click OK to close the Edit Settings dialog box.

Restore a Deleted Directory Service User

If you are restoring a deleted user with the Volume Manager or Reporter privilege, the user must be added to one or more local user
groups.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Directory Users subtab, click Actions → Restore Deleted User. The Restore Deleted User wizard opens.
4. Select the directory service user that you want to restore, then click Next. The wizard advances to the next page.
5. (Volume Manager and Reporter only) Add the local user to one or more local user groups.
a. In the Local User Groups area, click Change. The Select Local User Groups dialog box opens.
b. (Optional) To create a new local user group, click Create Local User Group, then complete the Create Local User Group
wizard. For user interface reference information, click Help.
c. Select the check box for each local user group you want to associate with the local user.
d. When you are finished, click OK. The Select Local User Groups dialog box closes.
6. Modify the remaining user settings as needed.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.
7. When you are finished, click Finish to close the wizard, then click OK to close the Edit Settings dialog box.

Storage Center Maintenance 115

Managing Local Storage Center User Password Requirements
Setting password requirements for local Storage Center users increases the password security for all Storage Center local users.

Configure Local Storage Center User Password Requirements

Set local user password requirements to increase the complexity of local user passwords and improve the security of the Storage
Center.
About this task
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Password Configuration tab.
3. Select the Enabled check box.
4. Configure the password requirements as necessary.
• To set the number of previous passwords that Storage Center checks against when validating a password, type a value in
the History Retained field. To disable previous password validation, type 0.
• To set the minimum number of characters in a new password, type a value in the Minimum Length field. To match the
Storage Center minimum password length, set the value to 1.
• To set the number of login failures that lock out an account, type a number in the Account Lockout Threshold field. To
disable the account lockout threshold, type 0.
NOTE: Only administrator-level accounts can unlock other Storage Center accounts. Have more than one
Storage Center administrator-level account so that other Storage Center accounts can be unlocked.
• To require new passwords to follow complexity standards, select the Complexity Enabled checkbox. To disable the
password complexity requirement, clear the Complexity Enabled checkbox.
• To set the number of days before a user can change his or her password, type a value in the Minimum Age field. To disable
the minimum age requirement, type 0.
• To set the number of days after which a password expires, type a value in the Maximum Age field. To disable the maximum
age requirement, type 0.
• To set the number of days before a password expires when the expiration warning message is issued, type a value in the
Expiration Warning Time field. To disable the expiration warning message, type 0.
• To specify the password expiration warning message that a user receives, type a warning message in the Expiration
Warning Message. The expiration warning message is blank if this field is left empty.
5. Click OK.

Reset the Password Aging Clock

The password aging clock determines when a password expires based on the minimum and maximum age requirements. Reset the
password aging clock to start the password aging clock from the current date and time.
Prerequisites
Password Configuration must be enabled.

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Password Configuration tab.
3. Select the Reset Aging Clock check box.
4. Click OK.

Require Users to Change Passwords

The new password requirements apply to new user passwords only. Require users to change passwords at next login so the
password complies with the new password requirements.
Prerequisites
Password Configuration must be enabled.

116 Storage Center Maintenance

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage CenterSettings dialog box opens.
2. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
3. Click the Password Configuration tab.
4. Select the Requires Password Change check box.
5. Click OK.

Managing Directory User Groups

Granting access to a directory user group grants access to all directory users that belong to the group.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Grant Access to a Directory User Group

Grant access to a directory user group to allow directory users in the group to log in to the Storage Center.
Prerequisites
• The Storage Center must be configured to authenticate users with an external directory service.

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage CenterSettings dialog box opens.
2. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
3. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
4. On the Directory User Groups subtab, click Grant Access to Directory User Groups. The Grant Access to Directory User
Groups dialog box opens.
5. In the Display Name field, type a name to identify the directory user group.
6. In the Distinguished Name field, type the distinguished name for the directory user group.
Example: CN=Groupname,CN=Users,DC=example,DC=com
7. From the Privilege drop-down menu, select the privilege level to assign to the user group.
• Administrator: When selected, directory users in the group have full access to the Storage Center.
• Volume Manager: When selected, directory users in the group have read and write access to the folders associated with
the assigned user groups.
• Reporter: When selected, directory users in the group have read-only access to the folders associated with the assigned
user groups.
8. (Volume Manager and Reporter only) Add one or more local user groups to the directory user group.
a. In the Local User Groups area, click Change. The Select Local User Groups dialog box appears.
b. (Optional) To create a new local user group, click Create Local User Group, then complete the Create Local User Group
wizard. For user interface reference information, click Help.
c. Select the check box for each local user group you want to associate with the directory user group.
d. When you are finished, click OK. The Select Local User Groups dialog box closes.
9. When you are finished, click OK. The Grant Access to Directory User Groups dialog box closes.
10. Click OK to close the Edit Settings dialog box.

Increase the Privilege Level for a Directory User Group

The privilege level can be increased for directory service groups that have the Volume Manager or Reporter privilege. The privilege
level for a directory service group cannot be decreased.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Directory User Groups subtab, select the directory user group, then click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box
opens.
4. From the Privilege drop-down menu, select the privilege level to assign to the user group.
• Administrator – When selected, directory users in the group have full access to the Storage Center.

Storage Center Maintenance 117

 • Volume Manager – When selected, directory users in the group have read and write access to the folders associated with
the assigned user groups.
• Reporter – When selected, directory users in the group have read-only access to the folders associated with the assigned
user groups.
5. When you are finished, click OK. The Edit Settings dialog box closes.
6. Click OK to close the Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box.

Modify Local Group Membership for a Directory User Group

Local user groups grant access to volume, server, and disk folders for directory user groups with the Volume Manager or Reporter
privilege level.

1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Directory User Groups subtab, select the directory user group, then click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box
appears.
4. Modify local group membership for the directory user group.
a. In the Local User Groups area, click Change. The Select Local User Groups dialog box appears.
b. (Optional) To create a new local user group, click Create Local User Group, then complete the Create Local User Group
wizard. For user interface reference information, click Help.
c. Select the check box for each local user group you want to associate with the directory user group.
d. To remove the directory user group from a local group, clear the check box for the local group.
e. When you are finished, click OK. The Select Local User Groups dialog box closes.
5. When you are finished, click OK. The Edit Settings dialog box closes.
6. Click OK to close the Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box.

Delete a Directory User Group

Delete a directory user group if you no longer want to allow access to the directory users that belong to the group.
Prerequisites
The Storage Center must be added to Storage Manager using a Storage Center user with the Administrator privilege.

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Users and User Groups tab.
3. On the Directory User Groups subtab, select the directory user group, then click Delete. The Delete dialog box opens.
4. Click OK to confirm.
5. Click OK to close the Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box.

Managing Front-End IO Ports

Front-end ports connect an Storage Center directly to a server using SAS connections or to the Ethernet networks and Fibre
Channel (FC) fabrics that contain servers that use storage. iSCSI, FC, or SAS IO ports can be designated for use as front-end ports.
NOTE: For Storage Manager clients connected to an SCv2000 series controller with a Data Collector: If an SCv2000
series controller is connected to a server with a SAS front end, nothing related to that SAS connection will be visible in
the servers view of Storage Manager.

Front-End Connectivity Modes

Storage Center uses either legacy mode, virtual port mode, or ALUA port mode to transport data to servers that use SAN storage.
In legacy mode, front-end IO ports are configured in pairs of primary and reserved ports. In virtual port mode, all ports are active,
and if one port fails the load is distributed between the remaining ports within the same fault domain. In ALUA port mode, volumes
are mapped using two paths, active and passive.
NOTE: In Legacy mode, reserve ports and primary ports reside on separate controllers, providing controller-level failover
only. Legacy mode does not provide port-level failover.

118 Storage Center Maintenance

The front-end connectivity mode is configured independently for Fibre Channel and iSCSI. Both transport types can be configured
to use the same mode or different modes to meet the needs of the network infrastructure. For example, a Storage Center can be
configured to use virtual port mode for iSCSI and legacy mode for FC.

• The front-end connectivity mode for FC and iSCSI ports is initially selected during Storage Center deployment.
• After deployment, the front-end FC and/or iSCSI ports can be changed from legacy mode to virtual port mode.
– After FC and/or iSCSI ports are configured for virtual port mode, they cannot be changed back to legacy mode.
NOTE: Dell strongly recommends using virtual port mode unless the network environment does not meet the
requirements for virtual port mode.
• The front-end connectivity mode for SAS front-end is always ALUA port mode and cannot be changed.

Virtual Port Mode

Virtual port mode provides port and controller redundancy by connecting multiple active ports to each Fibre Channel or Ethernet
switch.
In virtual port mode, each physical port has a WWN (World Wide Name), and is also assigned an additional virtual WWN. Servers
target only the virtual WWNs. During normal conditions, all ports process IO. In the event of a port or controller failure, a virtual
WWN will move to another physical WWN in the same fault domain. When the failure is resolved and ports are rebalanced, the
virtual port returns to the preferred physical port.

Virtual port mode provides the following advantages over legacy mode:

• Increased performance: Because all ports are active, additional front-end bandwidth is available without sacrificing redundancy.
• Improved redundancy: Ports can fail over individually instead of by controller.
• Simplified iSCSI configuration: Each fault domain has an iSCSI control port that coordinates discovery of the iSCSI ports in the
domain. When a server targets the iSCSI port IP address, it automatically discovers all ports in the fault domain.

ALUA Port Mode

Asymmetric Logical Unit Access (ALUA) provides port and controller redundancy for SAS front-end connections.
Volumes mapped to a server using SAS front-end also have port and controller redundancy. Volumes mapped over SAS are mapped
to both controllers. The volume mapping is Active/Optimized on one controller and Standby on the other controller. If the port or
controller fails on the active controller, the paths to the other controller become Active/Optimized. The mapping on the first
controller switches to Standby. When the port or controller recovers, the mapping to the first controller returns to Active/
Optimized and the mapping to the second controller returns to Standby status.

Legacy Mode
Legacy mode provides controller redundancy for a dual-controller Storage Center by connecting multiple primary and reserved ports
to each Fibre Channel or Ethernet switch.
In legacy mode, each primary port on a controller is paired with a corresponding reserved port on the other controller. During normal
conditions, the primary ports process IO and the reserved ports are in standby mode. If a controller fails, the primary ports fail over
to the corresponding reserved ports on the other controller. This approach ensures that servers connected to the switch do not
lose connectivity if one of the controllers fails. For optimal performance, the primary ports should be evenly distributed across both
controllers. When possible, front-end connections should be made to separate controller IO cards to improve redundancy.

Fault Domains
Front-end ports are categorized into fault domains that identify allowed port movement when a controller reboots or a port fails.
Failure modes and port activity depend on whether the Storage Center is configured for Legacy mode, ALUA port mode, or Virtual
port mode.

Fault Domains for SCv2000 Series Controllers

When used on SCv2000 series controllers, Storage Center handles all fault domain creation and modification.
Fault domain behavior on SCv2000 series controllers:

• Fault domains are automatically generated.

Storage Center Maintenance 119

• There are always two fault domains for IO in Fibre Channel and iSCSI configurations, not including replication-only domains.
• Fault domains are automatically created for Flex/Embedded Ethernet ports.
• Four fault domains are created for front-end SAS ports.

NOTE: Fault domains cannot be modified by users with SCv2000 series controllers.

Fault Domains in Virtual Port Mode

In virtual port mode, fault domains group front-end ports that are connected to the same Fibre Channel fabric or Ethernet network.
All ports in a fault domain are available for IO. If a port fails, IO is routed to another port in the fault domain.
The following requirements apply to fault domains in virtual port mode:

• Fault domains are created for each front-end Fibre Channel fabric or Ethernet network.
• A fault domain must contain a single type of transport media (FC or iSCSI, but not both).
CAUTION: For iSCSI only, servers initiate IO to iSCSI ports through the control port of the fault domain. If an iSCSI
port moves to a different fault domain, its control port changes. This change disrupts any service initiated through
the previous control port. If an iSCSI port moves to a different fault domain, you must reconfigure the server-side
iSCSI initiators before service can be resumed.
• For each fault domain, it is a best practice to connect at least two cables from each controller to the Fibre Channel fabric or
Ethernet network.

Fault Domains in Legacy Mode

In Legacy Mode, each pair of primary and reserved ports are grouped into a fault domain. The fault domain determines which ports
are allowed to fail over to each other.
The following requirements apply to fault domains in legacy mode on a dual-controller Storage Center:

• A fault domain must contain one type of transport media (FC or iSCSI, but not both).
• A fault domain must contain one primary port and one reserved port.
• The reserved port must be located on a different controller than the primary port.
NOTE: For a single-controller Storage Center, only one fault domain is required for each transport type (FC or
iSCSI) because there are no reserved ports.

Failover Behavior
Legacy mode, ALUA port mode, and virtual port mode behave differently during failure conditions because they use different
mechanisms to provide fault tolerance.

Scenario Virtual Port Mode Legacy Mode ALUA Port Mode

Normal operating All ports are active and pass IO. • Primary ports pass IO. • Active/Optimized ports pass
conditions • Reserved ports remain in a IO.
standby mode until a • Standby ports remain in a
controller failure. standby mode until a
controller or port failure.

A controller fails in a dual- Virtual ports on the failed Primary ports on the failed Active/Optimized ports on the
controller Storage Center controller move to physical ports controller fail over to reserved failed controller fail over to
on the functioning controller. ports on the functioning Standby ports on the functioning
controller. controller.
A single port fails (single- An individual port fails over to The port does not fail over The port fails over to the
or dual-controller Storage another port in the fault domain. because there was no controller Standby port on the functioning
Center) failure. If a second path is controller.
available, MPIO software on the
server provides fault tolerance.

120 Storage Center Maintenance

Rebalancing Front-End Ports
If a controller has been added or taken offline, ports can become unbalanced. If local ports are unbalanced, you are prompted to
balance the ports by a message at the top of the Summary tab.
About this task
NOTE: Front-end ports are automatically rebalanced when using SCv2000 series controllers. Manual port rebalance is
not necessary.
Steps
1. Click the Summary tab.
2. In the banner message, click Rebalance Ports. The Rebalance Ports dialog box appears to display progress, and closes when
the rebalance operation is compete.

Managing Front-End IO Port Hardware

Front-end FC and iSCSI ports can be renamed and monitored with threshold definitions. iSCSI ports can be assigned network
configuration and tested for network connectivity.
For a Storage Center in virtual port mode, the Hardware tab displays a virtual port for each physical port. For physical ports, the
physical identity, speed, and hardware are given. For virtual ports, the current and preferred physical ports are shown.

NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Rename a Front-End IO Port

Set a display name for a physical or virtual IO port to make it more identifiable.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand Controllers→ controller name→ IO Ports→transport type, then select the IO
port.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. In the Name field, type a descriptive name for the IO port.
5. Click OK.

Reset a Front-End IO Port Name to the WWN

Reset a physical or virtual IO port name to the World Wide Name if you no longer need the descriptive name defined by an
administrator.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand Controllers→ controller name→ IO Ports→transport type, then select the IO
port.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box appears.
4. Click Reset name to WWN.
5. Click OK.

Change the Preferred Physical IO Port for a Virtual IO Port

Under normal operating conditions, a FC or iSCSI virtual port is hosted by its preferred physical port.
Prerequisites
The fault domain must be configured for virtual port mode.

• If a Storage Center has IO ports with different performance characteristics, you may want to configure a virtual port to use a
particular physical port.
• If a physical port is removed from a Storage Center, the corresponding virtual port must be assigned to a different physical port.
• A single physical port can be the preferred port for multiple virtual ports.

Storage Center Maintenance 121

Steps
1. Click the Hardware tab.
2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand Controllers→ controller name→ IO Ports→transport type→physical IO port, then
select the virtual IO port.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box appears.
4. From the Preferred Parent drop-down menu, select the WWN of the physical IO port that should host the virtual port when
possible.
5. Click OK.

Set or Modify the IP Address and Gateway for a Single iSCSI Port
Servers target the iSCSI port IP address to initiate iSCSI connections to the Storage Center.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand Controllers→controller_name→ IO Ports→ iSCSI, then select the iSCSI IO port.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. In the IPv4 Address field, type the new IPv4 address for the iSCSI I/O port.
5. Click OK.

Set or Modify the IP Address and Gateway for Multiple iSCSI Ports
If all iSCSI ports must be assigned new IP addresses, modify the ports simultaneously to save time.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand Controllers→ controller name→ IO Ports→ iSCSI.
3. In the right pane, click Edit iSCSI IO Ports. The Edit iSCSI IO Ports dialog box appears.
4. (Optional) Automatically assign an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway to each IO port based on initial values.
a. Specify initial values for automatic IO port configuration.
• To automatically assign IP addresses, type the initial IP address from which to assign sequential IP addresses in the
Starting IPv4 Address field.
• To automatically assign a subnet mask, type the subnet mask in the Subnet Mask field.
• To automatically assign a default gateway, type the default gateway in the Gateway field.
b. Click Auto-Fill. All IO ports displayed in the table are configured based on the specified initial values.
5. In the table of IO ports, modify the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway for each IO port as needed.
6. Click OK.

Test Network Connectivity for an iSCSI Port

Test connectivity for an iSCSI I/O port by pinging a port or host on the network.
About this task
NOTE: If multiple virtual fault domains (VLANs) are associated with the port, the physical fault domain is used for ping
tests issued from the Hardware tab. To test network connectivity for a VLAN, initiate a ping test from a physical port in
a fault domain on the Storage tab.
Steps
1. Click the Hardware tab.
2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand Controllers→ controller_name→ IO Ports→ iSCSI, then select the iSCSI I/O
port.
3. In the right pane, click Ping Address. The Ping Address dialog box opens.
4. If the port uses an IPv4 address, in the IPv4 Address field, type the IP address of the host to which you want to test
connectivity.
5. If the port uses either an IPv4 or IPv6 address, in the IP Address field, type the IP address of the host to which you want to
test connectivity.
6. From the Ping Size drop-down menu, select a size in bytes for the ping packets, not including overhead. If you select Other,
type a value between 1 and 17000 bytes in the field below the menu.

122 Storage Center Maintenance

 NOTE: The Ping Size drop-down menu might not appear depending on the hardware I/O cards used by the Storage
Center.
7. Click OK. A message displays the results of the test.
NOTE: If the physical or virtual port is located on a Chelsio iSCSI card, the first ping test to a specific IP address
fails and displays the error SendPing: No ARP entry for nn.nn.nn.nn, sending ARP now. Try
again later. Run the ping test again to verify connectivity.
8. Click OK to close the message.

Related links
Test Network Connectivity for an iSCSI Port in a Fault Domain

Configure Front-End IO Ports (SAS and Fibre Channel)

On SCv2000 series controllers, ports must be configured before they can be used as front-end ports. After Storage Manager
configures the port, it is also added to a fault domain.
Prerequisites
• The Storage Center must be a SCv2000 series storage system.
• The port cannot be already configured.

Steps
1. Click the Hardware tab.
2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand Controllers→ controller name→ IO Ports, then select an unconfigured SAS or
Fibre Channel IO port
3. In the right pane, click Configure Port.

Configure Front-End IO Ports (iSCSI)

On SCv2000 series controllers, ports must be configured before they can be used as front-end ports. After Storage Manager
configures the port, it is also added to a fault domain.
Prerequisites
• The Storage Center must be a SCv2000 series storage system.
• The port cannot be already configured.

Steps
1. Click the Hardware tab.
2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand Controllers → controller name → IO Ports → iSCSI, then select an iSCSI IO
port.
3. In the right pane, click Configure Port. The Configure Port dialog box opens.
4. In the IPv4 Address field, type a new IP address for the iSCSI IO port.
5. Click OK.
Storage Manager configures the IO port and adds it to the iSCSI fault domain.

Unconfigure Front-End IO Ports

On SCv2000 series controllers, when a port is down and will not be used, unconfigure the port.
Prerequisites
• The Storage Center must be a SCv2000 series storage system.
• The port must be down.

Steps
1. Click the Hardware tab.
2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand Controllers→ controller name→ IO Ports, then select a down IO port.
3. In the right pane, click Unconfigure Port. The Unconfigure Port confirmation dialog box opens.
4. Click OK.

Storage Center Maintenance 123

 Storage Manager unconfigures the port.

Deleting a Fault Domain

When converting a storage system from Legacy to Virtual mode or if more fault domains were set up than needed, it might be
necessary to delete fault domains. The option to delete the fault domain appears when all the ports are moved.

Move a Port
Before deleting a fault domain, move all the ports from the fault domain to another fault domain. If you cannot move the ports, the
fault domain cannot be deleted until you contact Dell Technical Support.
Prerequisites
Another fault domain must be available to move the port to.
Steps
1. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → ISCSI then select a Fault Domain.
2. Click Edit Settings.
3. Select a port in the fault domain.
4. Click Move Port.
The Move Port dialog box opens.
5. From the New Fault Domain drop-down menu, select the Fault Domain to which the port will be moved.
NOTE: If the port to be moved is in a different subnet than the destination fault domain, modify the IPv4 Address
field so that the port's new address is in the same subnet as the destination fault domain.

Delete a Fault Domain

Once all ports have been moved from a fault domain, you may delete the fault domain by following these steps.
Prerequisites
The fault domain does not include any ports.
Steps
1. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → ISCSI then select a fault domain.
2. Click Edit Settings → Remove Fault Domain.
NOTE: The option Delete Fault Domain will appear when the prerequisites have been met.
3. Click OK to remove the fault domain.

Remove Port from Fault Domain

This process removes a port if it is unnecessary or if you want to move it to a different fault domain. An error will occur if the port
being removed is the last port in the fault domain.

1. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → ISCSI then select a Fault Domain.
2. Click Edit Settings.
3. Click Remove Ports from Fault Domain.
4. Select the ports to be removed.
5. Click OK.

Grouping Fibre Channel IO Ports Using Fault Domains

Front-end ports are categorized into fault domains that identify allowed port movement when a controller reboots or a port fails.
Ports that belong to the same fault domain can fail over to each other because they have connectivity to the same resources.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

124 Storage Center Maintenance

Create a Fibre Channel Fault Domain
Create a Fibre Channel fault domain to group FC ports for failover purposes.
Prerequisites
The FC ports that will be added to the fault domain must be unconfigured. Ports that are already added to a fault domain or
designated as back-end ports cannot be added to a new fault domain.

• In virtual port mode, all FC ports that are connected to the same FC fabric should be added to the same fault domain.
• In legacy mode, each pair of primary and reserved ports connected to the same FC fabric should be added to a unique fault
domain. The primary port should be located on a different controller than the secondary port.

About this task

NOTE: Fibre Channel ports must be configured in Virtual Port Mode when using SCv2000 series controllers. Legacy
Mode is not supported.
Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains, then select Fibre Channel.
3. In the right pane, click Create Fault Domain. The Create Fault Domain dialog box opens.
4. In the Name field, type a name for the fault domain.
5. In the Ports table, select the Fibre Channel ports to add to the fault domain. All FC ports in the fault domain should be
connected to the same FC fabric.
6. Click OK.

Rename a Fibre Channel Fault Domain

The fault domain name allows administrators to identify the fault domain.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → Fibre Channel, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. In the Name field, type a name for the fault domain.
5. Click OK.

Delete a Fibre Channel Fault Domain

Delete a Fibre Channel fault domain if all ports have been removed and it is no longer needed.
Prerequisites
• The Storage Center Fibre Channel front-end IO ports must be configured for legacy mode. In virtual port mode, fault domains
cannot be deleted.
• The fault domain must contain no FC ports.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains→ Fibre Channel, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Delete. The Delete Fault Domain dialog box appears.
4. Click OK.

Storage Center Maintenance 125

Grouping iSCSI IO Ports Using Fault Domains
Front-end ports are categorized into fault domains that identify allowed port movement when a controller reboots or a port fails.
Ports that belong to the same fault domain can fail over to each other because they have connectivity to the same resources.
NOTE: For SC4020 storage controllers, the 10Gb Ethernet iSCSI port on each storage controller module is used only for
replication to another Storage Center. Front-end connectivity to servers is not supported for these ports.

iSCSI VLAN Tagging Support

iSCSI ports in a fault domain can be configured to use a VLAN ID. For each Storage Center, one of two levels of VLAN functionality
is available depending on the Storage Center OS version, Storage Center controller model, and iSCSI hardware. Basic VLAN
functionality is referred to as single-VLAN tagging, and enhanced VLAN functionality is referred to as multi-VLAN tagging.

Single-VLAN Tagging
If a Storage Center supports single-VLAN tagging, a maximum of 1 VLAN ID can be configured for each iSCSI IO port. An iSCSI IO
port can belong to only one fault domain, and all ports in the same fault domain use the same VLAN ID.
Single VLAN tagging is supported by all Storage Center versions compatible with Storage Manager.

Multi-VLAN Tagging
If a Storage Center supports multi-VLAN tagging, a maximum of 64 VLAN IDs can be configured for each iSCSI IO port. An iSCSI IO
port can belong to up to 64 fault domains—one for each VLAN.
Multi-VLAN tagging is supported by Storage Centers that meet the multi-VLAN tagging requirements.

Multi-VLAN Tagging Requirements

The following table lists the requirements that a Storage Center must meet to support multi-VLAN tagging.

Requirement Description
Storage Center OS Version 6.5 or later must be installed on the Storage Center.
Storage Center controller model The Storage Center must have SC8000, SC4020, or CT-SC040
model controllers.
Storage Center iSCSI IO card hardware Chelsio T3/T5 10G iSCSI cards must be installed in the Storage
Center.
Storage Center front-end connectivity mode The Storage Center iSCSI ports must be configured for virtual
port mode. Legacy mode is not supported.

Types of iSCSI Fault Domains

When a Storage Center meets the multi-VLAN tagging requirements, two types of iSCSI fault domains can be created.

• Physical – The first fault domain configured for a given set of iSCSI ports.

– Physical fault domains do not require a VLAN ID, but can be configured to use a VLAN ID.
– Physical fault domains support iSCSI replication to and from remote Storage Centers.
• Virtual – Subsequent VLAN fault domains configured for the same set of iSCSI ports are referred to as virtual fault domains.

– Virtual fault domains must be assigned a VLAN ID.

– Virtual fault domains do not support iSCSI replication.
– Virtual fault domains do not support IPv6.

Creating iSCSI Fault Domains

Create an iSCSI fault domain to group ports that can fail over to each other because they have connectivity to the same resources.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

126 Storage Center Maintenance

Create a Physical iSCSI Fault Domain
Create a physical iSCSI fault domain to group physical ports for failover purposes.
Prerequisites
• In virtual port mode, all iSCSI ports that are connected to the same iSCSI network should be added to the same fault domain.
• In legacy mode, each pair of primary and reserved ports that are connected to the same iSCSI network should be added to a
unique fault domain. The primary port should be located on a different controller than the secondary port.
• Physical ports cannot be selected and added to a fault domain if they are already added to another fault domain.
• Each iSCSI port that you want to add to the fault domain must be assigned an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway in the
same network as the iSCSI control port for the fault domain.

About this task

NOTE: iSCSI ports must be configured in virtual port mode when using SCv2000 series controllers. Legacy mode is not
supported.
Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains, then select iSCSI.
3. In the right pane, click Create Fault Domain. The Create Fault Domain dialog box opens.
4. In the Name field, type a name for the fault domain.
5. (Virtual port mode only) Configure an IP address and gateway for the iSCSI control port in the fault domain. Servers target this
IP address using iSCSI initiators, and the Storage Center redirects individual iSCSI connections to the appropriate virtual port.
a. In the Target IPv4 Address field, type an IP address to assign to the iSCSI control port.
b. In the Subnet Mask field, type the subnet mask for the well-known IP address.
c. In the Gateway IPv4 Address field, type the IP address for the iSCSI network default gateway.
6. (Optional) In the Target IPv6 Address field, type an IP address to assign to the iSCSI control port.
7. (Optional) If necessary, assign a VLAN ID to the fault domain.
NOTE: If the Storage Center does not meet the multi-VLAN tagging requirements, a VLAN ID cannot be specified at
this time. Instead, modify the fault domain after it is created to add a VLAN ID.

a. Select the Physical option if you want to create a physical fault domain, that is, a fault domain that consists of physical
ports.
b. Select the Virtual option if you want to create a fault domain that consists of virtual ports.
c. Select the VLAN Tagged check box if you want to create a tagged fault domain that consist of physical ports.
d. In the VLAN ID field, type a VLAN ID for the fault domain. Allowed values are 1–4096.
e. (Optional) To assign a priority level to the VLAN, type a value from 0–7 in the Class of Service Priority field. 0 is best
effort, 1 is the lowest priority, and 7 is the highest priority.
8. In the Ports table, select the iSCSI ports to add to the fault domain. All iSCSI ports in the fault domain should be connected to
the same Ethernet network.
If creating a physical fault domain, physical ports appear in the list only if they are not assigned to any fault domain yet.
9. Click OK.

Next steps
(Optional) Configure VLANs for the iSCSI ports in the fault domain by creating a virtual fault domain for each VLAN. Base the virtual
fault domains on the physical fault domain.

Related links
Set or Modify the IP Address and Gateway for a Single iSCSI Port
Set or Modify the IP Address and Gateway for Multiple iSCSI Ports
Create a Virtual iSCSI Fault Domain
Add a VLAN ID to a Physical iSCSI Fault Domain
iSCSI VLAN Tagging Support

Storage Center Maintenance 127

Create a Virtual iSCSI Fault Domain
To add a VLAN ID to iSCSI ports that are already in use, use an existing iSCSI fault domain as the basis for a new VLAN iSCSI fault
domain.
Prerequisites
• The Storage Center must meet the multi-VLAN tagging requirements.
• Virtual fault domains do not support IPv6.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains→ iSCSI, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Create VLAN Copy. The Create VLAN dialog box opens.
4. In the Name field, type a name for the fault domain.
5. Configure an IP address and gateway for the iSCSI control port in the fault domain. Servers target this IP address using iSCSI
initiators, and the Storage Center redirects individual iSCSI connections to the appropriate virtual port.
a. In the Target IPv4 Address field, type an IP address to assign to the iSCSI control port.
b. In the Subnet Mask field, type the subnet mask for the well known IP address.
c. In the Gateway IPv4 Address field, type the IP address for the iSCSI network default gateway.
6. Configure VLAN tagging.
a. In the VLAN ID field, type VLAN ID for the fault domain. Allowed values are 1–4096.
b. (Optional) To assign a priority level to the VLAN, type a value from 0–7 in the Class of Service Priority field. 0 is best
effort, 1 is the lowest priority, and 7 is the highest priority.
7. Assign a VLAN IP address to each selected port in the Ports table by editing the corresponding field in the VLAN IP Address
column. Each port must have an IP address in the same network as the iSCSI control port, which is specified in the Well Known
IP Address field.
8. Click OK.

Related links
Create a Virtual iSCSI Fault Domain
iSCSI VLAN Tagging Support
Multi-VLAN Tagging Requirements

Modifying iSCSI Fault Domains

Modify an iSCSI fault domain to change its name, modify network settings for iSCSI ports in the domain, add or remove iSCSI ports,
or delete the fault domain.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Rename an iSCSI Fault Domain

The fault domain name allows administrators to identify the fault domain.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → iSCSI, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. In the Name field, type a name for the fault domain.
5. Click OK.

Modify iSCSI Fault Domain Control Port Network Settings

Configure an IP address and gateway for the iSCSI control port in the fault domain. Servers target this IP address using iSCSI
initiators, and the Storage Center redirects individual iSCSI connections to the appropriate virtual port.
Prerequisites
The Storage Center iSCSI ports must be configured for virtual port mode.

128 Storage Center Maintenance

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → iSCSI, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. In the Target IPv4 Address field, type an IP address to assign to the iSCSI control port.
5. In the Subnet Mask field, type the subnet mask for the well-known IP address.
6. In the Gateway IPv4 Address field, type the IP address for the iSCSI network default gateway.
7. (Optional) If IPv6 is supported, in the Target IPv6 Address field, type an IP address to assign to the iSCSI control port.
8. Click OK.

Add a VLAN ID to a Physical iSCSI Fault Domain

Add a VLAN ID to an existing iSCSI fault domain if the ports in the fault domain are connected to a tagged network.
Prerequisites
The Storage Center iSCSI ports must be configured for virtual port mode.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → iSCSI, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. Select the VLAN Tagged check box.
5. In the VLAN ID field, type a VLAN ID for the fault domain. Allowed values are 1–4096.
6. (Optional) To assign a priority level to the VLAN, type a value from 0-7 in the Class of Service Priority field. 0 is best effort, 1
is the lowest priority, and 7 is the highest priority.
7. Click OK.

Related links
iSCSI VLAN Tagging Support

Modify the MTU for an iSCSI Fault Domain

The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) specifies the largest packet size supported by the iSCSI network.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → iSCSI, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. From the MTU drop-down menu, select the largest packet size supported by the iSCSI network.
5. Click OK.

Modify the TCP Port for an iSCSI Fault Domain

By default, iSCSI ports accept iSCSI connections on TCP port 3260. Modify the port as needed to integrate with iSCSI network
infrastructure.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → iSCSI, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. Click Edit Advanced Port Settings. The Edit Port Settings dialog box opens.
5. In the Port Number field, type the TCP port to use for iSCSI traffic.
6. Click OK to close the Edit Port Settings dialog box, then click OK to close the Edit Settings dialog box.

Storage Center Maintenance 129

Modify the iSCSI Window Size for an iSCSI Fault Domain
The window size specifies the amount of data that can be in transit at any given time.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → iSCSI, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. Click Edit Advanced Port Settings. The Edit Port Settings dialog box opens.
5. In the Window Size field, type a value for the window size.
• Allowed values are 16 KB to 32 MB.
• The window size must be divisible by 16 KB.
6. Click OK to close the Edit Port Settings dialog box, then click OK to close the Edit Settings dialog box.

Modify Digest Settings for an iSCSI Fault Domain

The iSCSI digest settings determine whether iSCSI error detection processing is performed.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → iSCSI, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. Click Edit Advanced Port Settings. The Edit Port Settings dialog box opens.
5. In the Digest Settings area, enable or disable iSCSI digest settings as needed. These options are described in the online help.
6. Click OK to close the Edit Port Settings dialog box, then click OK to close the Edit Settings dialog box.

Modify Timeout Settings for an iSCSI Fault Domain

iSCSI timeout settings determine how the Storage Center handles idle connections.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → iSCSI, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box opens.
4. Click Edit Advanced Port Settings. The Edit Port Settings dialog box opens.
5. In the Timeout Settings area, modify the timeout values as needed. These options are described in the online help.
6. Click OK to close the Edit Port Settings dialog box, then click OK to close the Edit Settings dialog box.

Add Ports to an iSCSI Fault Domain

After you connect additional iSCSI ports to an existing iSCSI network, add the iSCSI ports to the fault domain that corresponds to
the network.
Prerequisites
• If the fault domain is physical, the iSCSI ports that will be added to the fault domain must not belong to a fault domain.
• If the fault domain is physical, each iSCSI port that you want to add to the fault domain must be assigned an IP address, subnet
mask, and gateway in the same network as the iSCSI control port for the fault domain.
• If the fault domain is virtual, the iSCSI ports you want to add to the fault domain must support the Multi-VLAN Tagging feature.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → iSCSI, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Add Ports to Fault Domain. The Add Ports to Fault Domain dialog box opens.
4. In the Select the ports to add table, select the iSCSI ports to add to the fault domain. All iSCSI ports in the fault domain should
be connected to the same Ethernet network.
5. (Virtual fault domain only) Assign a VLAN IP address to each selected port by editing the corresponding field in the VLAN IP
Address column. Each port must have an IP address in the same network as the iSCSI control port.
6. Click OK.

130 Storage Center Maintenance

Related links
Set or Modify the IP Address and Gateway for a Single iSCSI Port
Set or Modify the IP Address and Gateway for Multiple iSCSI Ports
iSCSI VLAN Tagging Support

Test Network Connectivity for an iSCSI Port in a Fault Domain

Test connectivity for an iSCSI physical or virtual I/O port by pinging a port or host on the network.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → iSCSI, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, right-click the physical port for which you want to test connectivity, then select Ping Address. The Ping
Address dialog box opens.
4. Type the IP address of the host to which you want to test connectivity.
• If the host uses either IPv4 or IPv6 addressing, type the IP address of the host to which you want to test connectivity in
the IP Address field.
• If the host uses IPv4 addressing only, type the IPv4 address in the IPv4 Address field.
5. From the Ping Size drop-down menu, select a size in bytes for the ping packets, not including overhead. If you select Other,
type a value between 1 and 17000 bytes in the field below the menu.
NOTE: The Ping Size drop-down menu might not appear depending on the hardware I/O cards used by the Storage
Center.
6. Click OK. A message displays the results of the test.
NOTE: If the physical port is located on a Chelsio iSCSI card, the first ping test to a specific IP address fails and
displays the error SendPing: No ARP entry for nn.nn.nn.nn, sending ARP now. Try again later. Run
the ping test again to verify connectivity.
7. Click OK to close the message.

Related links
Test Network Connectivity for an iSCSI Port

Remove Ports from an iSCSI Fault Domain

Before you repurpose one or more front-end iSCSI ports, remove them from the fault domains to which they belong.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → iSCSI, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Remove Ports from Fault Domain. The Remove Ports from Fault Domain dialog box appears.
4. Select the check box for each iSCSI port that you want to remove from the fault domain, then click OK.

Delete an iSCSI Fault Domain

Delete an iSCSI fault domain if all ports have been removed and it is no longer needed.
Prerequisites
• The Storage Center iSCSI front-end IO ports must be configured for legacy mode. In virtual port mode, fault domains cannot be
deleted.
• The fault domain must contain no iSCSI ports.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains→ iSCSI, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Delete. The Delete Fault Domain dialog box appears.
4. Click OK.

Storage Center Maintenance 131

Configuring NAT Port Forwarding for iSCSI Fault Domains
Port forwarding allows iSCSI initiators (servers or remote Storage Centers) located on a public network or different private network
to communicate with Storage Center iSCSI ports on a private network behind a router that performs Network Address Translation
(NAT).
For each Storage Center iSCSI control port and physical port, the router performing NAT must be configured to forward
connections destined for a unique public IP address and TCP port pair to the private IP address and TCP port for the iSCSI port.
These port forwarding rules must also be configured in parallel on the Storage Center fault domains to make sure that iSCSI target
control port redirection functions correctly. Fault domains can only be modified by administrators.

NOTE: If Storage Center iSCSI ports are configured for legacy mode, the port forwarding rules do not need to be
defined on the Storage Center because there is no control port redirection.

iSCSI NAT Port Forwarding Requirements for Virtual Port Mode

The following requirements must be met to configure NAT port forwarding for an iSCSI fault domain in virtual port mode.

• For each Storage Center iSCSI control port and virtual port, a unique public IP address and TCP port pair must be reserved on
the router that performs NAT.
• The router that performs NAT between the Storage Center and the public network must be configured to forward connections
destined for each public IP address and port pair to the appropriate Storage Center private target iSCSI IP address and private
port (by default, TCP port 3260).

iSCSI NAT Port Forwarding Example Configuration

In this example, a router separates the Storage Center on a private network (192.168.1.0/24) from a server (iSCSI initiator) on the
public network (1.1.1.60). To communicate with Storage Center iSCSI target ports on the private network, the server connects to a
public IP address owned by the router (1.1.1.1) on ports 9000 and 9001. The router forwards these connections to the appropriate
private IP addresses (192.168.1.50 and 192.168.1.51) on TCP port 3260.

Figure 14. iSCSI NAT Port Forwarding Diagram

1 iSCSI initiator (server or remote Storage Center)

2 Router performing NAT/port forwarding
3 Storage Center

Configure NAT Port Forwarding for an iSCSI Fault Domain

Configure NAT port forwarding for a fault domain to make sure that control port redirection works correctly.
Prerequisites
When the router that performs NAT and port forwarding receives inbound iSCSI connections destined for the specified public IP
and public port, it forwards the connections to the private Storage Center iSCSI IP address and private port (by default, TCP port
3260).
• The Storage Center iSCSI ports must be configured for virtual port mode.
• For each Storage Center iSCSI control port and virtual port, a unique public IP address and TCP port pair must be reserved on
the router that performs NAT.
• The router that performs NAT between the Storage Center and the public network must be configured to forward connections
destined for each public IP address and port pair to the appropriate Storage Center private iSCSI IP address and appropriate
port (by default, TCP 3260).

132 Storage Center Maintenance

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → iSCSI, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Configure NAT Port Forwarding. The Configure NAT Port Forwarding dialog box opens.
4. In the Port Forwarding Configuration area, configure port forwarding information for a Storage Center iSCSI port.
a. Click Add. The Create iSCSI NAT Port Forward dialog box opens.
b. From the Port Name drop-down menu, select the iSCSI control port or a physical port.
• Control ports are labeled with the name of the fault domain.
• Physical ports are labeled with a WWN.
c. In the Public IPv4 Address field, type the IPv4 address that iSCSI initiators (servers and remote Storage Centers)
communicate with on the public network to reach the Storage Center iSCSI port.
d. In the Public Port field, type the TCP port that iSCSI initiators communicate with on the public network to reach the
Storage Center iSCSI port.
e. Click OK. The Create iSCSI NAT Port Forward dialog box closes.
5. Repeat the preceding steps for each additional iSCSI control port and physical port in the fault domain.
6. In the Public Networks/Initiators area, define an iSCSI initiator IP address or subnet that requires port forwarding to reach the
Storage Center because it is separated from the Storage Center by a router performing NAT.
a. Click Add. The Create iSCSI NAT Initiator Configuration dialog box opens.
b. In the Public IPv4 Address field, type the IPv4 address for the iSCSI initiator or subnet for which NAT port forwarding is
required.
c. In the Subnet Mask field, type the subnet mask for the iSCSI initiator IP address or subnet.
7. Repeat the preceding steps for each additional iSCSI initiator IP address or subnet that requires port forwarding.
8. Click OK. The Configure NAT Port Forwarding dialog box closes.

Modify NAT Port Forwarding for an iSCSI Fault Domain

Modify NAT port forwarding to change the port forwarding configuration or change the iSCSI initiators and subnets that require
port forwarding.
Prerequisites
• The Storage Center iSCSI ports must be configured for virtual port mode.
• For each Storage Center iSCSI control port and virtual port, a unique public IP address and TCP port pair must be reserved on
the router that performs NAT.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → iSCSI, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Configure NAT Port Forwarding. The Configure NAT Port Forwarding dialog box opens.
4. In the Port Forwarding Configuration area, modify port forwarding information for a Storage Center iSCSI port.
• To add port forwarding information for an iSCSI port, click Add.
• To modify port forwarding information for an iSCSI port, select the port, then click Edit.
• To delete port forwarding information for an iSCSI port, select the port, then click Remove.
5. In the Public Networks/Initiators area, add or modify iSCSI initiator IP addresses or subnets that require port forwarding to
reach the Storage Center because it is separated from the Storage Center by a router performing NAT.
• To add an iSCSI initiator IP address or subnet, click Add.
• To modify an iSCSI initiator IP address or subnet, select it, then click Edit.
• To delete an iSCSI initiator IP address or subnet, select it, then click Remove.
6. Click OK. The Configure NAT Port Forwarding dialog box closes.

Storage Center Maintenance 133

Configuring CHAP for iSCSI Fault Domains
When Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) authentication is enabled, the Storage Center challenges each iSCSI
initiator in the fault domain for a shared secret (password). When CHAP is enabled it applies to all servers and remote Storage
Centers that connect to the fault domain.
NOTE: When CHAP is enabled for an iSCSI fault domain, all iSCSI initiators in the fault domain (servers and Storage
Centers) must be configured to use CHAP. All iSCSI initiators that are not configured to use CHAP are no longer able to
communicate with the Storage Center iSCSI ports in the fault domain.

Configure CHAP for Servers in an iSCSI Fault Domain

When Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) authentication is enabled, the Storage Center challenges each iSCSI
initiator for a shared secret (password). Servers must provide the correct shared secret to access Storage Center volumes.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → iSCSI, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Configure CHAP. The Configure CHAP dialog box opens.
4. Select the CHAP Enabled check box.
5. Define the CHAP configuration for each server in the fault domain that initiates iSCSI connections to the Storage Center.
a. Click Add. The Add Remote CHAP Initiator dialog box opens.
b. In the iSCSI Name field, type the iSCSI name of the remote initiator.
c. In the Remote CHAP Name field, type the CHAP name of the remote initiator.
d. (Bidirectional CHAP only) In the Local CHAP Secret field, type the shared secret that the Storage Center (target) must
provide when challenged by the remote initiator. This secret is required if bidirectional CHAP is enabled on the remote iSCSI
initiator.
e. In the Remote CHAP Secret field, type the shared secret that the remote initiator must provide when challenged by the
Storage Center (target).
f. Click OK to close the Add Remote CHAP Initiator dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the Configure CHAP dialog box.
7. Configure each remote iSCSI initiator to use the shared secrets that you defined.

Modify CHAP Settings for a Server in an iSCSI Fault Domain

Modify CHAP settings for a server to change one or more shared secrets for the server.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → iSCSI, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Configure CHAP. The Configure CHAP dialog box opens.
4. In the Remote CHAP Configuration table, select a CHAP configuration, then click Edit. The Edit Remote CHAP Initiator
dialog box appears.
5. Modify the options as needed, then click OK. The Edit Remote CHAP Initiator dialog box closes.
6. Click OK to close the Configure CHAP dialog box.

Remove CHAP Settings for a Server in an iSCSI Fault Domain

Remove CHAP settings for a server to prevent it from targeting the Storage Center while CHAP is enabled for the fault domain.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → iSCSI, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Configure CHAP. The Configure CHAP dialog box opens.
4. In the Remote CHAP Configuration table, select a CHAP configuration, then click Remove. The CHAP configuration is
removed from the table.
5. Click OK to close the Configure CHAP dialog box.

134 Storage Center Maintenance

Enable Bidirectional CHAP for iSCSI Replication in a Fault Domain
When bidirectional CHAP is enabled for iSCSI replication, the source Storage Center (initiator) challenges the destination Storage
Center (target) for a shared secret.
Prerequisites
CHAP must be enabled for the fault domain.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains → iSCSI, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Configure CHAP. The Configure CHAP dialog box opens.
4. Type a shared secret in the Bidirectional CHAP Secret field.
5. Click OK.

Grouping SAS IO Ports Using Fault Domains

Front-end ports are categorized into fault domains that identify allowed port movement when a controller reboots or a port fails.
Ports that belong to the same fault domain can fail over to each other because they have connectivity to the same resources.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Create a SAS Fault Domain

Create a SAS fault domain to group SAS ports for failover purposes on SC4020 controllers.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, right-click Fault Domains and select Create SAS Fault Domain.
3. In the Name field, type a name for the fault domain.
4. In the Ports table, select the SAS ports to add to the fault domain.
When pairing SAS ports into the fault domain:
• Use one port from each controller.
• Make sure the paired ports have the same port number and are connected to the same server.
5. Click OK.

Delete a SAS Fault Domain

Delete a SAS fault domain if it is no longer needed.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Fault Domains→ SAS, then select the fault domain.
3. In the right pane, click Delete. The Delete Fault Domain dialog box appears.
4. Click OK.

Managing Disks and Disk Folders

Manage disks by adding new disks and organizing disks in disk folders.
Add disks and enclosures to accommodate greater data needs. The supported number of enclosures attached to Storage Center
depends on the controller and enclosure being used.

When adding disks be aware of the following.

• After disks are added, additional space may not be immediately available. Make sure to allow enough time for Storage Manager
to allocate space for writes.

Storage Center Maintenance 135

• Create a new disk folder only to address specific application program requirements. Creating a second disk folder may cause
storage to be used inefficiently.
• Data cannot be written to unassigned disks.
• The Assigned disk folder was created during initial configuration of the Storage Center. Managing unassigned disks means
moving the disk to a managed disk folder.
• When Storage Manager detects self-encrypting drives (SEDs) that are Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) 140-2
certified, it formats the drives for Secure Data use.

– If Self-Encrypting Drives is licensed, Storage Manager can manage disks in a Secure Data folder.
– If Self-Encrypting Drives is not licensed, disks will be treated as unsecured drives, but may be upgraded to Secure Data
status if a license is purchased in the future.

Disk Management on SCv2000 Series Controllers

Storage Centers with SCv2000 series controllers manage disks automatically, limiting the disk management options. After adding
disks, Storage Center recognizes the new disks, creates a new disk folder if necessary, then manages the disks in the disk folder. If
a disk is intentionally down for testing purposes, then is deleted, you can restore the disk to manage the disk again in a disk folder.
The following disk management options are not available with SCv2000 series controllers:

• Creating disk folders

• Adding disks to disk folders
• Managing disk spares

Related links
Restore a Disk

Scan for New Disks

Scanning for disks recognizes new disks and allows them to be assigned to a disk folder.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, click the Disks node.
3. Click Scan For Disks. After the scan completes, a confirmation dialog box appears.
4. Click OK.

Create a Disk Folder

Creating a disk folder also manages unassigned disks into the new disk folder and sets the tier redundancy.
About this task
NOTE: Having multiple disk folders may cause storage to be used inefficiently.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, click the Disks node.
3. Click Create Disk Folder. The Create Disk Folder dialog box appears displaying all unmanaged disks and designates spare
disks.
4. Type a name in the Name field.
5. To select the disks to be managed, click Change.
6. To modify the tier redundancy, click the Create Storage Type check box then modify the redundancy for each tier as needed.
• For single redundant RAID levels, select Redundant.
• For dual-redundant RAID levels, select Dual Redundant.
7. Click OK.

Related links
Create Secure Data Disk Folder

136 Storage Center Maintenance

Delete Disk Folder
Delete a disk folder if all disks have been released from the folder and the folder is not needed.
Prerequisites
The disk folder does not contain disks.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand the Disks node.
3. Select a disk folder.
4. Click Delete. The Delete Folder dialog box appears.
5. Click OK.

Modify a Disk Folder

The disk folder Edit Settings dialog box allows you to change the name of the folder, add notes, or change the Storage Alert
Threshold.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand the Disks node then select a disk folder.
3. Click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box appears.
4. Modify the following attributes as needed.
• To change the name of the disk folder, type a name into the Name field.
• To add notes to the disk folder, type text into the Notes field.
• To change the percent of remaining data that initiates a threshold warning, select a value from the Storage Alert
Threshold drop-down menu.
• If the folder is a Secure Data disk folder, enable or disable the Rekey option by clicking the Rekey checkbox.
• If the folder is a Secure Data disk folder, specify a rekey interval by typing a value in the field.
5. Click OK.

Manage Unassigned Disks

Manage Unassigned Disks assigns disks to an existing disk folder. A RAID rebalance is required to complete managing disks.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Disks node.
3. Click Manage Unassigned Disks. The Manage Unassigned Disks dialog box appears.
4. From the Disk Folder drop-down menu, select a disk folder.
5. To change which disks will be assigned, click Change.
6. To schedule a RAID rebalance select one of the following options.
• To start a RAID rebalance after creating the disk folder, select Perform RAID rebalance immediately.
• To schedule a RAID rebalance for a later time, select Schedule RAID rebalance then select a date and time.
7. To skip the RAID rebalance, select I will start RAID rebalance later.
NOTE: To use all available space, perform a RAID rebalance.
8. Click OK.

Enable or Disable the Disk Indicator Light

The drive bay indicator light identifies a drive bay so it can be easily located in an enclosure.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand the enclosure and select Disks.

Storage Center Maintenance 137

3. In the right pane, select the disk, then click Indicator On/Off.

Release a Disk
Release a disk before removing it from an enclosure. The disk is fully released after performing a RAID rebalance.
About this task
NOTE: Do not release disks from a disk folder unless the remaining disks have enough free space for the re-striped data.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand the Disks node then a disk folder.
3. Click a disk.
4. Click Release Disks. The Release Disk(s) dialog box appears showing the disks to be released.
5. Schedule a RAID rebalance.
• To start a RAID rebalance after releasing the disk, select Perform RAID rebalance immediately.
• To schedule a RAID rebalance, select Schedule RAID rebalance then select a date and time.
6. To skip the RAID rebalance, select I will start RAID rebalance later.
7. Click OK.

Cancel Releasing a Disk

After releasing a disk, the data remains on the disk until the RAID rebalance is complete. Cancel releasing a disk if the RAID
rebalance has not completed and the data is still on the disk. Canceling the release reassigns the disk to the disk folder to which it
was previously assigned.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand the Disks node.
3. Expand a disk folder, then select a disk marked for release.
4. Click Cancel Release Disk. The Cancel Release Disk(s) dialog box appears.
5. Click OK.

Delete a Disk
Deleting a disk removes that disk object from Dell Storage Manager. Before deleting the disk object, you must release the disk,
moving the data off the disk.
Prerequisites
• The disk failed and it does not have any allocated blocks.
• The disk was removed from the enclosure.
• If the disk was in an enclosure that has been removed, that enclosure object must be deleted first.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, click Disks.
3. Expand a disk folder, then select a disk.
4. Click Delete. The Delete Disk dialog box appears.
5. Click OK.

Related links
Restore a Disk

138 Storage Center Maintenance

Restore a Disk
After a disk fails, Storage Center does not allow that disk to be managed again. If the disk is down for testing purposes then deleted,
the disk can be restored so that Storage Center can manage the disk again.
Prerequisites
• The Storage Center must be running version 6.6 or later
• The disk must have been down, removed from the enclosure, then deleted.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand the Disks node then the unassigned disk folder.
3. Click a disk.
4. Click Restore Disk.
The Restore Disk dialog box appears.
5. Click OK.
Storage Center restores the disk and adds it to a disk folder.

Replace a Failed Disk

The Replace Failed Disk wizard identifies a disk and provides steps to replace the disk.
Prerequisites
The disk must be down
Steps
1. Expand the Disks section of the navigation pane.
2. Select the failed disk. Click Replace Disk.
The Replace Failed Disk wizard appears.
3. Click Next once the failed disk is located.
4. Follow the instructions to physically remove the failed disk from the enclosure. Click Next.
5. Insert the new disk into the enclosure, following all instructions. Click Next.
Storage Center attempts to recognize the replacement disk.
6. If the disk replacement succeeded, Storage Center confirms this. It also displays information about the new disk.
7. Click Finish to close the wizard.

Managing Secure Data

Secure Data provides data-at-rest encryption with key management for self-encrypting drives (SED). The Self-Encrypting Drives
feature must be licensed to use Secure Data.

How Secure Data Works

Using Secure Data to manage SEDs requires an external key management server. If a key management server has not been
configured or is unavailable, Storage Center allows SEDs to be managed; however, it will not secure the SEDs until the key
management server is available and configured, at which point they will be secured.
NOTE: Create a backup for the key management server before removing an SED and after managing an SED.

Each FIPS disk in Storage Center has an internal Media Encryption Key (MEK). The key resides on the disk, providing encryption for
data written to the disk and decryption for data as it is read from the disk. Destroying the key makes any data on the disk
immediately and permanently unreadable, a process referred to as a crypto erase. When you add an SED to, or release an SED from
a Secure Data folder, the MEK is destroyed and a new key is generated. Creating a new key allows the disk to be reused, although
all previous data is lost.

Storage Center Maintenance 139

 NOTE: Managing a FIPS SED and assigning it to a Secure Data folder destroys the encryption key on the disk, which
makes any previous data on the disk unreadable.
Not to be confused with the MEK, the Storage Center manages a separate set of keys for providing data-at-rest encryption. These
keys are referred to as authority credentials. The purpose of these keys is to protect the theft of any number of drives. If a secured
drive from a Secure Data folder is removed from the system such that power is removed, the drive will be locked and customer data
will be unreadable.

NOTE: Storage Center will not be able to manage a previously-managed drive as an SED if the key has been deleted
from the drive or the key management server.
Authenticating to the drive using the authority credential is the only means of unlocking the drive while preserving customer data,
which can only be obtained by successfully authenticating to the related key management server through a secure channel.

Use the Copy Volumes to Disk Folder operation to copy volumes from a Secure Data folder to another folder. The destination
folder can be either a secure folder or a nonsecure folder.

To protect data at rest, all SEDs in a Secure Data disk folder lock when power is removed (lock on reset enabled). When power is
removed from the drive, the drive cannot be unlocked without an authority credential.

When replicating from a Secure Data volume to a non-Secure Data folder, that volume is no longer secure after it leaves the Secure
Data folder. When replicating a non-Secure Data volume to a Secure Data folder, that volume is not secure until it replicates to the
Secure Data folder and Data Progression runs.

Configure Key Server

Before managing SEDs in a Secure Data folder, configure communication between Storage Center and the key management server.
Prerequisites
The Storage Center must have the Self-Encrypting Drives license.

Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Edit Settings. The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box opens.
2. Click the Secure Data tab.
3. In the Hostname field, type the host name or IP address of the key management server.
4. In the Port field, type the number of a port with open communication with the key management server.
5. In the Timeout field, type the amount of time in seconds after which Storage Center should stop attempting to reconnect to
the key management server after a failure.
6. To add alternate key management servers, type the host name or IP address of another key management server in the
Alternate Hostnames area. Then click Add.
7. If the key management server requires a user name to validate the Storage Center certificate, type the name in the Username
field.
8. If the key management server requires a password to validate the Storage Center certificate, type the password in the
Password field.
9. Configure the key management server certificates.
a. Click Configure Key Management Server Certificates. The Configure Key Management Server Certificates dialog box
opens.
b. Click Browse next to the Root CA Certificate. Navigate to the location of the root CA certificate on your computer and
select it.
c. Click Browse next to the certificate fields for the controller(s). Navigate to the location of the controller certificates on
your computer and select them.
d. Click OK.
10. Click OK.

After you configure the key server, the Server Connectivity status is shown as Up on the Edit Storage Center Settings dialog
box.

140 Storage Center Maintenance

Create Secure Data Disk Folder
A Secure Data folder can contain only SEDs that are FIPS certified. The Create Disk folder dialog box shows the Secure Data folder
option if Storage Manager recognizes unmanaged SEDs and has the Self-Encrypting Drives license.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. Click the Disks node.
3. Click Create Disk Folder.
The Create Disk Folder dialog box opens. The dialog box displays all unmanaged disks and designates spare disks.
4. Select the Create as a Secure Data folder checkbox.
NOTE: All non-SEDs must be removed from the Unmanaged Disks table before creating a Secure Data folder.
5. Type a name in the Name field.
6. To change which disks will be managed, click Change.
7. To modify the tier redundancy, select the Create Storage Type checkbox and then modify the redundancy for each tier as
needed.
• For single-redundant RAID levels, select Redundant.
• For dual-redundant RAID levels, select Dual Redundant.
8. Click OK.

Managing Data Redundancy

Manage data redundancy by modifying tier redundancy, creating Storage Types, or rebalancing RAID.

Managing RAID
Modifying tier redundancy, or adding or removing disks can cause data to be unevenly distributed across disks. A RAID rebalance
redistributes data over disks in a disk folder.

Rebalance RAID
Rebalancing RAID redistributes data over the disks according to the Storage Type. Rebalance the RAID after releasing a disk from a
disk folder, a disk fails, or adding a disk.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Disks node.
3. Click Rebalance RAID. The RAID Rebalance dialog box appears. If a RAID rebalance is needed, the dialog box shows RAID
rebalance options.
4. Select Perform RAID Rebalance immediately.
5. Click OK.

Cancel a RAID Rebalance

Cancel a RAID rebalance to stop an on-going RAID rebalance. After canceling, Storage Manager will still recommend a RAID
rebalance.
About this task
NOTE: The RAID rebalance stops after completing the current rebalance pass.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Disks node.
3. Click Rebalanace RAID. The RAID Rebalance dialog box appears.
4. Click Stop Rebalancing. After rebalance stops, a confirmation dialog box appears.
5. Click OK.

Storage Center Maintenance 141

Schedule a RAID Rebalance
Schedule a RAID rebalance to rebuild the data on all of the disks at a later date.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the Disks node.
3. Click Rebalanace RAID. The RAID Rebalance dialog box appears. If a RAID rebalance is needed, the dialog box shows RAID
rebalance options.
4. Select Schedule RAID rebalance.
5. Select a date and time.
6. Click OK.

Check the Status of a RAID Rebalance

The RAID Rebalance displays the status of an in-progress RAID rebalance and indicates whether a rebalance is needed.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, click the Disks node.
3. Select Rebalance RAID. The RAID Rebalance dialog box shows the status of a RAID rebalance.

Managing Storage Types

Storage Types determine how Data Progression moves data within a disk folder. Each disk folder has a corresponding Storage Type.
NOTE: Modifying tier redundancy requires a RAID rebalance to be completed, and should not be performed unless
sufficient free disk space is available within the disk folder.

Redundancy Requirements
Redundancy requirements for each disk tier are based on the size of disks in the tier.

• By default, disks of 900 GB are set to dual redundancy. This setting can be changed to single-redundant for disks under 1.8 TB.
• In a Storage Center with a new disk pool, disks 1.8 TB or larger require dual redundancy, and the single redundancy option is
disabled.
• When adding 2.6 TB or larger disks to an existing Storage Center, dual redundancy is mandatory, and the single redundancy
option is disabled.
NOTE: Dual redundancy is implemented using RAID 6, which requires a minimum of seven disks to configure RAID 6
with a single spare. If a tier does not contain seven disks, the default setting is single-redundant for any disk drive
size.

Create a Storage Type

Creating a Storage Type sets the redundancy level for each tier and assigns the Storage Type to a disk folder.
Prerequisites
Storage Center must be using one of the following controllers:
• SC9000
• SC8000
• SC4000 series
• CT-SC040

About this task

NOTE: Do not assign multiple Storage Types to one disk folder. Data Progression may not perform as intended with
multiple Storage Types assigned to one disk folder.
Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, click Storage Types.

142 Storage Center Maintenance

3. Click Create Storage Type. The Create Storage Type dialog box opens.
4. Select a disk folder from the Disk Folder drop-down menu.
5. Select a redundancy type.
• To create a redundant Storage Type, select Redundant.
• To create a non-redundant Storage Type, select Non-Redundant.
6. For redundant Storage Types, modify the redundancy for each tier as needed.
• For single-redundant RAID levels, select Redundant.
• For dual-redundant RAID levels, select Dual Redundant.
7. Select a Datapage Size.
8. Click OK.

Modify Tier Redundancy

Modify tier redundancy to change the redundancy level for each tier in a Storage Type. After modifying tier redundancy, a RAID
rebalance is required to move data to the new RAID levels.
About this task
NOTE: Do not modify tier redundancy if there is insufficient space in the tier for a RAID rebalance.

Steps
1. Click the Storage tab.
2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Storage Types then click a Storage Type.
3. Click Modify Tier Redundancy. The Modify Tier Redundancy dialog box opens.
4. Modify the redundancy for each tier as needed.
• For single-redundant RAID levels, select Redundant.
• For dual-redundant RAID levels, select Dual Redundant.
5. Click OK. A RAID rebalance starts.

Managing Disk Enclosures

Storage Manager can rename an enclosure, set an asset tag, clear the swap status for replaceable hardware modules in a disk
enclosure, mute alarms, reset the temperature sensors, and delete an enclosure from a Storage Center.

Add an Enclosure
This step-by-step wizard guides you through adding a new enclosure to the system.
Prerequisites
This wizard is only available for the SCv2000 series, and can be done without a controller outage. The option will display only if the
Storage Center has the ability to add enclosures.
Steps
1. Click the Hardware tab.
2. In the navigation pane, select Enclosures.
3. Click Add Enclosure.
The Add New Enclosure wizard appears.
4. Confirm the details of your current install, and click Next to validate the cabling.
If the cabling is wrong, an error message appears. You can proceed to the next step once the error is corrected and validated.
5. If the storage system is 2U in size, select the enclosure type and click Next.
6. Follow the instructions to insert disks into the new enclosure and turn on the enclosure. Click Next.
7. If the storage system is made up of two or more enclosures, follow the instructions to disconnect the A side chain cable from
an existing enclosure.
8. Connect the A side chain cables to the new enclosure by following the displayed instructions. Click Next to validate the cabling.
If the enclosure cannot be detected, an error will appear. You can proceed to the next step once the cabling is validated.

Storage Center Maintenance 143

9. If the storage system is made up of two or more enclosures, follow the instructions to disconnect the B side chain cables from
the existing enclosure
10. Connect the B side chain cables to the new enclosure by following the displayed instructions.
11. Click Next to validate the cabling.
If the enclosure cannot be detected, an error will appear. You can proceed to the next step once the cabling is validated.
12. Click Finish to exit the wizard.

Remove an Enclosure
This step-by-step wizard guides you through removing an enclosure to the system without a controller outage.
Prerequisites
• This wizard is only available for the SCv2000 series controllers.
• The option will display only if Storage Center has the ability to remove enclosures and data has been removed from all disks in
the selected enclosure.

Steps
1. Click the Hardware tab.
2. Expand the Enclosures section in the navigation pane. Select the enclosure you want to remove.
3. Click Remove Enclosure.
The Remove Enclosure wizard appears.
4. Confirm the details of your current install, and click Next.
5. Locate the enclosure in the Storage Center and click Next.
6. Follow the directions to disconnect the A side chain cables connecting the enclosure to the Storage Center. Click Next.
7. Reconnect the A side chain cables by following the directions to exclude the enclosure. Click Next.
8. Follow the directions to disconnect the B side chain cables connecting the enclosure to the Storage Center. Click Next.
9. Reconnect the B side chain cables by following the directions to exclude the enclosure. Click Next to validate the cabling and
delete the enclosure.
If the cabling is invalid, an error message appears. You can proceed to the next step once the error is corrected and validated.
10. Click Finish to exit the wizard.

Replace an Enclosure
The Replace Enclosure wizard guides you through replacing an enclosure in the storage system.
Prerequisites
• Requires a controller outage
• Available only for the SCv2000 series controller
• Available only if data has been released from all disks in the selected enclosure and the situation allows the replacement of an
enclosure

Steps
1. Click the Hardware view.
2. Expand Enclosures in the navigation pane. Select the enclosure you want to replace.
3. Click Replace Enclosure.
The Replace Enclosure wizard appears.
4. Click Next to accept the warning of service interruption.
5. Follow the instruction for locating the enclosure in the rack.
6. Click Next.
7. Follow all instructions to remove disks from the enclosure.
8. Click Next.
9. Disconnect the enclosure from the Storage Center.
10. Click Next.

144 Storage Center Maintenance

11. Add disks to your enclosure by following the instructions.
12. Click Next.
13. Follow the instructions to connect the A-side chain.
14. Click Next.
The wizard checks that the enclosure is connected.
15. Follow the instructions to connect the B-side chain.
16. Click Next.
The wizard validates the cabling.
17. Click Finish to exit the wizard.

Rename a Disk Enclosure

Change the display name of a disk enclosure to differentiate it from other disk enclosures.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select an enclosure.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box appears.
4. In the Name field, type a new name for the enclosure.
5. Click OK.

Set an Asset Tag for a Disk Enclosure

An enclosure asset tag can be used to identify a specific component for company records. Storage Manager allows you to set an
asset tag for enclosures that support it.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select the enclosure.
3. In the right pane, click Edit Settings. The Edit Settings dialog box appears.
4. In the Asset Tag field, type an asset tag for the enclosure.
5. Click OK.

Delete an Enclosure
Delete an enclosure if it will be physically removed from the Storage Center.
Prerequisites
• All data must be moved off the enclosure by releasing the disks and rebalancing RAID.
• The enclosure must be down.

Steps
1. Click the Hardware tab.
2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select the enclosure.
3. In the right pane, click Delete Enclosure. The Delete Enclosure dialog box appears.
NOTE: If there are no disks currently in that enclosure, the dialog will not appear. The enclosure will be removed
without a request for confirmation.
4. Click OK.

Mute an Enclosure Alarm

Mute an enclosure alarm to prevent it from sounding.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select Audible Alarms under the enclosure.
3. In the right pane, right-click the audible alarm, then select Request Mute.

Storage Center Maintenance 145

Unmute an Enclosure Alarm
Unmute an enclosure alarm to allow it to sound.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select Audible Alarms under the enclosure.
3. In the right pane, right-click the audible alarm, then select Request Mute Off.

Clear the Swap Status for an Enclosure Cooling Fan

Clear the swap status for an enclosure cooling fan to acknowledge that it has been replaced.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select Cooling Fan Sensors.
3. In the right pane, select the cooling fan, then click Request Swap Clear.

Clear the Swap Status for an Enclosure IO Module

Clear the swap status for an enclosure IO module to acknowledge that it has been replaced.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select I/O Modules.
3. In the right pane, select the IO module, then click Request Swap Clear.

Clear the Swap Status for an Enclosure Power Supply

Clear the swap status for an enclosure power supply to acknowledge that it has been replaced.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select Power Supplies.
3. In the right pane, select the power supply, then click Request Swap Clear.

Clear the Under Voltage Status for a Power Supply

Clear the under voltage status for an enclosure power supply to acknowledge that you are aware of it.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select Power Supplies.
3. In the right pane, select the power supply, then click Request DC Undervoltage Clear.

Clear the Swap Status for a Temperature Sensor

The swap status for a temperature sensor is set when the component that contains the sensor is replaced.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select Temperature Sensors.
3. In the right pane, right-click the sensor, then click Request Swap Clear.

Clear the Minimum and Maximum Recorded Values for Temperature Sensor
Clear the minimum and maximum recorded values for a temperature sensor to reset them.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select Temperature Sensors.
3. In the right pane, right-click the sensor, then click Request Min/Max Temps Clear.

146 Storage Center Maintenance

Enable or Disable the Disk Indicator Light
The drive bay indicator light identifies a drive bay so it can be easily located in an enclosure.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand the enclosure and select Disks.
3. In the right pane, select the disk, then click Indicator On/Off.

Clear the Swap Status for a Disk

Clear the swap status for a disk to acknowledge that it has been replaced.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select Disks.
3. In the right pane, select the disk, then click Request Swap Clear.

Managing Storage Center Controllers

Storage Manager can help you manage and maintain the controllers in your Storage Center.
Storage Manager can walk you through adding a controller, replacing a failed controller, replacing a failed cooling fan sensor, and
replacing a power supply.

Add a Controller
This step-by-step wizard guides you through adding a new controller to the storage system.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the navigation pane, select Controllers .
3. Click Add Controller.
The Add New Controller wizard appears.
4. Confirm the details of your current install, and click Next.
5. Insert the controller into the existing enclosure. Click Next to validate the install.
6. Click Finish to exit the wizard.

Replace a Failed Controller

This step-by-step wizard guides you through replacing a failed controller in the Storage Center without an additional controller
outage.
Prerequisites
This wizard is only available for the SCv2000 series controllers
Steps
1. Click the Hardware tab.
2. Expand Controllers in the navigation pane. Select the failed controller.
3. Click Replace Failed Controller.
The Replace Failed Controller wizard appears.
4. Refer to the graphic in the wizard to located the failed controller. Click Next.
5. Follow the instructions to remove the battery from the failed controller. Click Next.
6. Follow the instructions to remove the failed controller from the Storage Center. Click Next.
7. Insert the battery from the failed controller into the new controller. Click Next.
8. Follow the instructions to insert the new controller into the Storage Center. Click Next to validate the installation.
If the installation fails, an error message appears. You can proceed to the next step once the error is corrected and validated.
9. Click Finish to exit the wizard.

Storage Center Maintenance 147

Enable or Disable a Controller Indicator Light
Enable a controller indicator light to assist in locating the controller in the rack.
Prerequisites
• The controller must be running Storage Center version 6.7 or higher
• SC8000 or SC9000 storage controllers only

Steps
1. Click the Hardware tab, then select a controller.
2. In the right pane, click Indicator On.
3. To disable the controller indicator light, click Indicator Off.

Replace a Failed Cooling Fan Sensor

This step-by-step wizard guides you through replacing a failed cooling fan sensor in an enclosure in the Storage Center without a
controller outage.
Prerequisites
This wizard is only available for the SCv2000 series.
Steps
1. Expand Enclosures in the navigation pane. Select the enclosure with the failed cooling fan sensor, then select Temperature
Sensor.
2. Click Replace Failed Cooling Fan Sensor.
The Replace Failed Cooling Fan Sensor wizard appears.
3. Refer to the graphic in the wizard to locate the failed cooling fan sensor. Click Next.
4. Follow the instructions to remove the power supply from the enclosure. Click Next.
5. Follow the instructions to insert the replacement power supply. Click Next to verify the replacement.
If this verification fails, an error message appears. You can proceed to the next step once the error is corrected and validated.
6. Click Finish to exit the wizard.

Replace a Failed Power Supply

This step-by-step wizard guides you through replacing a failed power supply in an enclosure in the Storage Center.
Prerequisites
This wizard is only available for the SCv2000 series, and can be completed without a controller outage.
Steps
1. Expand Enclosures in the navigation pane. Select the enclosure with the failed power supply, then select Power Supply.
2. Click Replace Power Supply.
The Replace Failed Power Supply wizard appears.
3. Refer to the graphic in the wizard to locate the failed power supply. Click Next.
4. Follow the instructions to remove the failed power supply. Click Next.
5. Follow the instructions to insert the replacement power supply. Click Next to verify the replacement.
If this verification fails, an error message appears. You can proceed to the next step once the error is corrected and validated.
6. Click Finish to exit the wizard.

Managing IO Card Changes

The Configure IO Card Changes wizard simplifies the task of moving, replacing, upgrading, or repurposing IO cards in Storage
Center controllers. The wizard is used to configure IO card hardware changes on a per-port basis after physical IO card changes
have been made. The wizard is typically used when upgrading IO cards or controllers.
For each local port, you can specify:

• Whether to link an IO card to an existing configuration

148 Storage Center Maintenance

• Whether the IO card is new hardware
• Whether to delete the configuration for a removed IO card

The wizard guides you through the following actions:

• Associating IO cards with existing port configurations

• Indicating which IO cards are new hardware
• Deleting configurations for IO cards that have been removed

Before using the wizard, you should be aware of the following:

• Changes should be performed by a certified installer or with the assistance of Dell Technical Support.
• At least one back-end port must remain in its original location.
• A controller restart is required to implement changes.
• Do not rebalance any ports until controller(s) have been replaced and all hardware configuration changes are complete.

Plan a Hardware Change

Upon boot, the Storage Center searches back-end targets for the configuration. Because a controller cannot boot without
configuration information, back-end access must be maintained during the controller replacement procedure. This can be done in
two ways:

• Keep at least one common back-end slot/port defined and connected in the same manner on the new hardware configuration
as it was on the old hardware configuration.
• Connect the back-end to a port that is undefined on the new hardware configuration. Storage Center is able to detect iSCSI
targets and acquire the boot configuration from the drives even though the slot/port is marked as undefined.

When the appropriate back-end slot/port is identified, record this information on the Port Usage Work Sheet and continue the
upgrade process.

Change the Hardware

Changing hardware follows these general tasks. Refer to upgrade documentation for the specific change for more detailed
instructions.

1. Power down and unplug the controller. This reduces downtime by facilitating re-cabling. In a dual-controller Storage Center,
the second controller takes on all functions of the Storage Center, preventing a system outage.
2. Record/tag the cabling for the affected card.
3. Disconnect the cables on the IO card.
4. Replace, move, or remove the IO card(s) and reconnect as recorded on the Port Usage Work Sheet.
5. Plug in and power on the controller.

Manage IO Card Changes

After a change to an IO card in a Storage Center controller, the Configure IO Card Changes wizard applies old port configurations to
the new or modified ports. Changes can include replacing an IO card, moving the IO card to a different PCI slot, and removing an IO
card. Use the Configure IO Card Changes wizard to apply existing IO card port configuration settings to new or modified IO card
ports.

1. In the notification banner of the Summary tab, click Configure IO Card Change. The Configure IO Card Changes wizard
appears.
NOTE: If the controller must be restarted to move configurations to the other controller, the Configure IO Card
Changes wizard shows the option to restart the controller.
2. (Optional) Click Restart Controller.
3. Click Next.
4. From the Fibre Channel, iSCSI, or SAS table, identify ports that have been modified.
5. From the Card Location drop-down menu, select a port configuration.
6. Click Finish.

Storage Center Maintenance 149

Updating Storage Center
Update a Storage Center to the latest version using the Dell Storage Manager Client connected directly to the Storage Center, or
connected to a Data Collector. Updating using the Dell Storage Manager Client requires SupportAssist to be enabled or the Storage
Center Update Utility. For more information on the Storage Center Update Utility, see Using the Storage Center Update Utility.

Update Storage Center Software

Update Storage Center software with the Dell Storage Manager Client connected directly to a Storage Center, or to a Data
Collector.
Prerequisites
• SupportAssist must be enabled or the Storage Center Update Utility is configured.
• This option is available for Storage Center version 6.6 and later.

About this task

The type of update will determine the options displayed in the dialogs below.
Steps
1. In the Summary tab, click Actions → System → Check for Update.
The Update Storage Center dialog box appears and checks for an update.
2. Select an Update Action:
• Select Download and Install Now to download and apply the update immediately.
• Select Download Now and Install Later to download the update right away and install later.
3. Select an Installation Type:
• To apply all updates including those affecting service, select Apply all updates.
• To apply non-service affecting updates to required components, select Apply required components — Non-Service
Affecting.
• To apply all updates to required components, select Apply required components — Service Affecting.
• To apply only non-service affecting updates, select Apply non-service affecting updates.

NOTE: Service-affecting installation types require a controller outage. Service will be interrupted.
4. Click OK.
5. (Optional) If you select Apply all updates and Download and Install now, the Download and Install Update Confirmation
dialog appears. Enter the Storage Center Administrator Username and Password to continue.
The Update Storage Center dialog appears. This dialog displays details of the installation process and updates those details
every 30 seconds. This is also displayed as a blue message bar in the Summary tab, and in the update status column of the
Storage Center details. In case of an update failure, click Retry to restart the interrupted process.
6. Click OK.
If the update is service affecting, the connection between Storage Manager and Storage Center will be lost.

Using the Storage Center Update Utility

The Storage Center Update Utility acts as an update server for Storage Centers without an internet connection or with Dell
SupportAssist disabled. To use the Storage Center Update Utility to update Storage Center software, install the utility, load an
update package, and start the service. Then, if the Storage Center is configured to use the Storage Center Update Utility, manually
check for an update and update the Storage Center software. If a Storage Center is configured to use the Storage Center Update
Utility, you must check for updates manually.
For more information on installing and setting up the Storage Center Update Utility, see the Dell Storage Center Update Utility
Administrator’s Guide.

NOTE: The Dell Storage Center Update Utility supports updating Storage Centers from version 6.6 or higher.

150 Storage Center Maintenance

Configure Storage Center to Use the Storage Center Update Utility
If the Storage Center is not connected to the internet, configure it to use the Storage Center Update Utility when checking for
updates. Before Storage Center can receive an update from the Storage Center Update Utility, a Storage Center distro must be
loaded and the Storage Center Update Utility service must be running.
Prerequisites
• SupportAssist must be disabled.
• The Storage Center Update Utility must be setup.
• The Storage Center must be running version 6.6 or higher.
• To update a Storage Center, the Storage Center Update Utility must be running.

Steps
1. Click Edit Settings.
The Edit Storage Center Settings dialog box appears.
2. Click the Dell SupportAssist tab.
3. Under Configure Update for updating Storage Center, select the Enabled check box.
4. In the Update Utility Host or IP Address field, type the IP address of the Storage Center Update Utility.
5. In the Update Utility Port field, type the port of the Storage Center Update Utility.
6. Click OK.

Shutting Down and Restarting a Storage Center

Shutting down or restarting a Storage Center affects all controllers. Controllers can also be shut down or restarted individually.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

Shut Down All Controllers in Storage Center

Shutting down a Storage Center creates a system outage, during which time no IO is processed. Use this process only as directed,
for example to replace hardware, to move the Storage Center to another location, or to shut down for data center power
maintenance.
Prerequisites
• An outage must be scheduled so that halting IO does not impact your network.
• IO to the controllers must be halted.

Steps
1. In the right pane, click Actions→ System→ Shutdown/Restart. The Shutdown/Restart dialog box appears.
2. From the first drop-down menu, select Shutdown.
3. Click OK.
4. After the controllers have shut down, shut down the disk enclosures by physically turning off the power supplies.

Next steps
After the outage is complete, see the Owner’s Manual for your controller for instructions on how to start the controllers in the
proper order.

Related links
Set Storage Center Cache Options

Storage Center Maintenance 151

Restart All Controllers in a Storage Center
If the Storage Center has dual-controllers, the controllers can be restarted in sequence or simultaneously.

1. In the right pane, click Actions→ System→ Shutdown/Restart. The Shutdown/Restart dialog box appears.
2. From the first drop-down menu, select Restart.
3. (Dual-controller only) From the Restart options drop-down menu, choose how you want the controllers to restart.
• To restart the controllers one after the other, avoiding an outage, select Restart in Sequence.
• To restart the controllers at the same time, causing an outage, select Restart Simultaneously.
4. Click OK.

Shut Down a Controller

If the Storage Center has dual-controllers, the remaining controller continues to process IO. If the Storage Center has only one
controller, shutting it down creates an outage.

1. Click the Hardware tab, then select the controller.

2. In the right pane, click Shutdown/Restart Controller. The Shutdown/Restart Controller dialog box appears.
3. From the drop-down menu, select Shutdown.
4. Click OK.

Restart a Controller
If the Storage Center has dual-controllers, the remaining controller continues to process IO. If the Storage Center has only one
controller, restarting it down creates an outage.

1. Click the Hardware tab, then select the controller.

2. In the right pane, click Shutdown/Restart Controller. The Shutdown/Restart Controller dialog box appears.
3. From the drop-down menu, select Restart.
4. Click OK.

Reset an SCv2000 series controller to Factory Default

Reset an SCv2000 series controller to apply the factory default settings, erase all data stored on the controller, and erase all data on
the drives.
Prerequisites
• The Storage Center must be an SCv2000 series controller.
• The SCv2000 series controller must be running Storage Center version 6.7 or later.

About this task

CAUTION: Resetting the controller to factory defaults erases all information on the controller and all data on the drives.

Steps
1. From the Actions drop-down menu, select System → Reset to Factory Defaults.
The Reset Storage Center to Factory Defaults dialog box appears.
2. In the Factory Reset Token field, type the text above the Factory Reset Token field exactly as it appears in the dialog box.
3. In the Storage Center Administrator Username field type the username of a Storage Center user with administrator-level
privileges.
4. In the Storage Center Administrator Password field type the password of a Storage Center user with administrator-level
privileges.
5. To restart the controller after the reset, select Power on the Storage Center after resetting to factory defaults.
6. Click OK.
The Storage Center resets to the factory default settings.

152 Storage Center Maintenance

Managing Field Replaceable Units (FRU)
The FRU Manager maintains the status of FRUs and issues action tickets when a unit needs to be replaced. Storage Manager
displays FRU tickets that contain specific information on each FRU, and provides the ability to close tickets.
NOTE: The FRU Manager supports only SCv2000 series storage systems.

Managing FRU Tickets

FRU Manager maintains FRU tickets for disks. Storage Manager can display information on FRU tickets, and can also close FRU
tickets.
NOTE: If FRUs and FRU Manager are not enabled, Storage Manager will not display options or tickets.

View a FRU Ticket

To view the status of a replacement Field Replacement Unit (FRU) view the FRU ticket from the Alerts tab.

1. Click the Alerts tab.

2. Select a FRU ticket.
3. Click View FRU Ticket.
The FRU Ticket Information dialog appears.

Close a FRU Ticket

Close a FRU ticket if the FRU ticket is not needed.

1. Click the Alerts tab.

2. Select a FRU ticket.
3. Click Close FRU Ticket.
The Close FRU Ticket dialog appears.
4. Click OK to close the ticket.

Storage Center Maintenance 153

154
 7
Viewing Storage Center Information
Storage Manager provides access to summary information about managed Storage Centers, including historical IO performance and
hardware status. Use this information to monitor the health and status of a Storage Center.

Viewing Summary Information

Storage Center summary plugins provide summary information for individual Storage Centers. The summary plugins can also be
used to compare multiple Storage Centers.

Viewing Summary Information for a Storage Center

The Summary tab displays information about the Storage Center in the Status, Storage Summary, and Current Alerts areas.

Figure 15. Summary Tab

Using the Status Plugin

The Status plugin displays Storage Center disk space information and the status of alerts.

• Use the top part of the Status view to compare the amount of used disk space with amount of free disk space on a Storage
Center.
• Use the bottom part of the Status plugin to view a summary of alerts on a Storage Center.

Figure 16. Status Plugin

Viewing Storage Center Information 155

Status Information
The top portion of the Status plugin displays information about disk space usage.

Field/Option Description
Configured Space Total size for all user-visible volumes.
Available Space Total amount of disk space available on all of the disks of a
Storage Center.
Free Space Amount of disk space available for use by a Storage Center,
displayed in units of data and as a percentage of Available
Space.
Used Space Amount of disk space used by a Storage Center, displayed in
units of data and as a percentage of Available Space.

Alert Information
The top portion of the Status plugin displays information about the alerts for a Storage Center.
The alert icons indicate the highest active alert level.

Alert Icon Description

Indicates no unacknowledged alerts for a category
Indicates that the highest unacknowledged alert level is Warning
Indicates that the highest unacknowledged alert level is Error

The following types of alerts are summarized on the Status plugin.

Alert Type Description

Current Alerts Displays the total number of Storage Center alerts and the
number of alerts for the each of following categories:
• Storage Alerts
• Disk Alerts
• Hardware Alerts
• System Alerts
• Connectivity Alerts

The Current Alerts status icon indicates the highest

unacknowledged alert level for the categories under Current
Alerts.
Replication Restore Point Alerts Displays the total number of restore point alerts.

Viewing More Detailed Status Information

The Status plugin provides shortcuts to areas that display more detailed information.

Display More Information About Disk Space

Click More Details, which is located to the right of the disk space information, to display the Storage tab for the selected Storage
Center.

Display More Information About the Current Alerts

Click Current Alerts to display the Storage Center Alerts tab on the Monitoring view.

156 Viewing Storage Center Information

Using the Storage Summary Plugin
The Storage Summary plugin displays a bar chart that shows detailed information about disk space on a Storage Center and a
graph that shows the past four weeks of disk space usage for a Storage Center.

Figure 17. Storage Summary Plugin

Use this graph to compare the amount of used disk space to the amount of available disk space on a Storage Center. In addition,
use this graph to compare the used disk space to the alert threshold for disk space. An alarm occurs if the amount of used disk
space reaches the alert threshold value.

Storage Summary Object Count Area

Use the Object Count area to view the type and number of storage objects that exist on the Storage Center.

Storage Summary Bar Chart

Use the bar chart to view available disk space, allocated disk space, used disk space, free disk space, and Savings vs RAID 10. In
addition, the amount of configured disk space and oversubscribed disk space is displayed below the bar chart.
The following information is displayed in the bar chart on the Storage Summary plugin:

Field/Option Description
Configured Space Total size for all user-visible volumes.
Oversubscribed Space Configured Space minus the Available Space.
Available Space Total amount of disk space available on the disks of a Storage
Center.
Free Space Amount of disk space available for use by a Storage Center,
displayed in units of data and as a percentage of Available
Space.
Allocated Space Amount of disk space allocated on the disks, displayed in units of
data and as a percentage of Available Space.
Used Space Amount of disk space used by a Storage Center, displayed in
units of data and as a percentage of Available Space.
Savings vs RAID 10 Amount of disk space saved by effective use of RAID 5/6
and/or Data Reduction instead of RAID 10.

Manipulating the Storage Summary Bar Chart

You can change the zoom level of the chart, save it as an image, or print it.

Zoom in on an Area of the Bar Chart

Zoom in if you want to view more details.

1. Use the mouse to select an area of the bar chart in which to zoom.
a. Click and hold the right or left mouse button on the bar chart.
b. Drag the mouse to the right to select an area of the bar chart.
2. Release the mouse button to zoom into the selected area of the bar chart.

Viewing Storage Center Information 157

Return to the Normal View of the Bar Chart
If you have changed the zoom level of the chart, you can return to the normal view.

1. Click and hold the right or left mouse button on the bar chart.
2. Drag the mouse to the left to return to the normal zoom level of the bar chart.

Save the Chart as a PNG Image

Save the chart as an image if you want to use it elsewhere, such as in a document or an email.

1. Right-click the bar chart and select Save As. The Save dialog box appears.
2. Select a location to save the image and enter a name for the image in the File name field.
3. Click Save to save the bar chart.

Print the Bar Chart

Print the chart if you want a paper copy.

1. Right-click the bar chart and select Print. The Page Setup dialog box appears.
2. Select the paper size to print to from the Size drop-down menu.
3. Select the Landscape radio button to allow the entire bar chart to print.
4. Click OK. The Print dialog box appears.
5. Select the printer to use from the Name drop-down menu.
6. Click OK. The bar chart is printed to the selected printer.

Using the Current Alerts Plugin

The Current Alerts plugin displays a table that lists alerts for a Storage Center and associated storage objects.

Figure 18. Current Alerts Plugin

Use this plugin to monitor and acknowledge Storage Center alerts.

Related links
Viewing Storage System Alerts

Acknowledge an Alert
Alerts can be acknowledged to indicate to the Storage Center that you have read the alert message and are aware of the problem.
Unacknowledged alerts displays a status of No in the Acknowledge field.

1. Select the unacknowledged alert(s) to acknowledge.

2. Right-click the selected alert(s) and select Acknowledge. The Acknowledge Alert dialog box appears.
NOTE: The Acknowledge option does not appear if one of the selected alerts is already acknowledged.
3. Click OK to acknowledge the selected alert(s).
The Acknowledged status of the selected alert(s) changes to Yes.

Update the List of Alerts

Update the list of alerts to view the most recent information.
Click Refresh to update the list of alerts.

158 Viewing Storage Center Information

Viewing Detailed Storage Usage Information
Detailed storage usage information is available for each Storage Type that is configured for a Storage Center.

View Storage Usage by Tier and RAID Type

Storage usage by tier and RAID type is displayed for each Storage Type.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Storage Type, then select the individual storage type you want to examine.
3. Click the Summary subtab to view storage usage by tier and RAID type.

Figure 19. Storage Tab Storage Type Node

View Storage Usage by Volumes

Storage usage by volume is displayed for each Storage Type.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Storage Type, then select the individual storage type you want to examine.
3. Click the Volumes subtab to view storage usage by volume.

Viewing Storage Center Information 159

 Figure 20. Storage Type Volumes Subtab

View Historical Storage Usage

Allocated space and used space over time is displayed for each Storage Type.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Storage Type, then select the individual storage type you want to examine.
3. Click the Historical Usage subtab to view allocated space and used space over time.

Figure 21. Storage Type historical Usage Tab

4. (Optional) Change the time span of the graph by clicking Last Week, Last Month, Last Year, or Custom.

160 Viewing Storage Center Information

View a Data Progression Pressure Report
For each storage type, the data progression pressure report displays how space is allocated, consumed, and scheduled to move
across different RAID types and storage tiers. Use the data progression pressure report to make decisions about the types of disks
to add to a Storage Center.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, expand Storage Type, then select the individual storage type that you want to examine.
3. Click the Pressure Report subtab to view the data progression pressure report. By default, the most recent data gathered
from the Storage Center is displayed.
4. (Optional) To view a previously generated data progression report, select a report from the drop-down menu. Reports are
identified by the date and time at which they were generated.

Figure 22. Storage Type Pressure Report Tab

The data progression pressure report displays the following information for each tier.

Pressure Report Description

Column
RAID Level Level in the tier.

Disk Track Type of track — either Fast or Standard.

Chart Bar chart displaying allocated space and space consumed.

Disk Allocated Space reserved for volumes.

Disk Used From the amount of space allocated, the amount that is in use by volumes.

Pressure Up In the next data progression cycle, the amount that will be moved up. Indicated in the bar chart by a
green bar and up arrow.

Pressure Down In the next data progression cycle, the amount that will be moved down. Indicated in the bar chart by an
orange bar and a down arrow.

Volume Allocated Amount of space reserved for use by volumes after RAID is applied.

Volume Used Amount of space used by volumes after RAID is applied.

Viewing Storage Center Information 161

 Pressure Report Description
Column
Saved as RAID 10 Amount of space saved by moving less-accessed data to RAID 5 rather than using RAID 10 for all data.

Viewing Current IO Performance

The Charting tab is used to view and monitor current IO performance statistics for a Storage Center and associated storage
objects. The Comparison View on the Charting tab is used to display and compare IO usage data from multiple storage objects.

Using the Charting Tab

Use the Charting tab to view current IO usage data for a Storage Center or associated storage object and compare IO usage data
for multiple storage objects.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

View Current IO Usage Data for a Storage Center

Select a Storage Center on the Charting tab to view current IO usage data.

1. Click the Charting tab.

2. Select the Storage Center from the Charting navigation pane.
The IO Charts tab displays a chart that shows the IO usage data for the Storage Center.
3. To refresh the IO usage data, click Refresh on the Charting navigation pane.
4. To stop collecting IO usage data from the Storage Center, click the Stop button. To resume collecting IO usage data, click the
Start button.

View Current IO Usage Data for a Storage Object

Select a specific object in the Charting tab navigation pane to view current IO usage data for the object.

1. Click the Charting tab.

2. Select a storage object from the from the Charting navigation pane.
3. Depending on the type of storage objects selected in the previous step, one or both of the following tabs appear:
• IO Charts: Displays charts that shows IO usage data.

– If a Storage Center is selected, the IO Charts tab displays IO usage data for the front end and back end connections of
the Storage Center.
– If a storage object is selected that has other storage objects assigned to it, the IO Charts tab displays calculated
averages of the IO usage data for all of the objects assigned to the selected storage object.
– If a storage object is selected that does not have storage objects assigned to it, the IO Charts tab displays the IO usage
data of the selected storage object.
• Most Active Report: Displays a table that shows the minimum, maximum, average, and standard deviation values of the IO
usage data, which the Storage Manager collects every 5 minutes by default.
The Most Active Report tab is displayed only if the selected storage object is one of the following container objects:

– Volumes or a volume folder

– Servers or a server folder
– Remote Storage Centers
– Disks or disk speed folder
4. To refresh the IO usage data, click Refresh on the Charting navigation pane.
5. To stop collecting IO usage data from the Storage Center, click the Stop button. To resume collecting IO usage data, click the
Start button.

162 Viewing Storage Center Information

Change the Period of Data to Display on the Charting Tab
You can display data for the last 5 minutes, last 15 minutes, last 30 minutes, or last hour.

1. Click the Charting tab.

2. Select the period of the IO usage data to display on the Charting tab from the Show Last drop-down menu.
• 5 Minutes: Displays the past 5 minutes of IO usage data.
• 15 Minutes: Displays the past 15 minutes of IO usage data.
• 30 Minutes: Displays the past 30 minutes of IO usage data.
• 1 Hour: Displays the past 60 minutes of IO usage data.

Display the Comparison View on the Charting tab

Use the Comparison View to compare current IO usage for storage objects.

1. Click Charting tab.

2. Click Select View on the Charting navigation pane.
3. Select Comparison View from the drop-down menu.
The options on the Charting navigation pane are replaced with Comparison View options.
4. Select the check boxes of the storage objects to compare from the Charting navigation pane.
NOTE: The Comparison View cannot compare more than 10 objects at one time.
5. Click Update.
The Total IO/Sec and Total MB/Sec charts appear by default and display the total IO usage for writes and reads, in IO/sec
and MB/Sec, for the selected storage objects.
6. Select the check boxes of additional charts to display:
NOTE: The charts that can be displayed depend on the storage objects that were selected in Step 6.

• Write IO/Sec: Displays writes, in IO/sec, for the selected storage objects in a single chart.
• Read IO/Sec: Displays reads, in IO/sec, for the selected storage objects in a single chart.
• Write MB/Sec: Displays writes, in MB/sec, for the selected storage objects in a single chart.
• Read MB/Sec: Displays reads, in MB/sec, for the selected storage objects in a single chart.
• Read Latency: Displays read latencies, in ms, for the selected storage objects in a single chart.
• Write Latency: Displays write latencies, in ms, for the selected storage objects in a single chart.
• Xfer Latency: Display data transfer latencies, in ms, for the selected servers or remote Storage Centers in a single chart.
• Avg IO Size: Displays average IO sizes for the selected storage objects in a single chart.
• IO Pending: Displays pending IOs for the selected storage objects in a single chart.
7. Click Update.

Configuring Chart Options

Charting options in the Edit User Settings dialog box affect charts in the Dell Storage Manager Client.

Customize Chart Colors

You can choose the background color, gridline color, and crosshair color for charts.

1. In the top pane of the Dell Storage Manager Client, click Edit User Settings. The Edit User Settings dialog box appears.
2. Click on the General tab. The following colors are displayed in the Charting Options area:
• Background Color: Color of the background behind the chart.
• Gridline Color: Color of the gridlines in the chart.
• Crosshair Color: Color of the crosshairs in the chart.
3. To customize a color, click the Change link located to the right of the current color swatch. The Select Color dialog box
appears.

Viewing Storage Center Information 163

 • To select a color from a list of color swatches, click the Swatches tab, and click on a color to select it.
• To select a color based on an HSB value, click the HSB tab, then enter the HSB value by specifying hue (H), saturation (S),
and brightness (B) values.
• To select a color based on an RGB value, click the RGB tab, then enter the RGB value by specifying red (R), green (G), and
blue (B) values.
4. Click OK to close the Select Color dialog box.
5. Click OK. The customized color settings will appear the next time a chart is updated.

Display Data Point Sliders on Charts

Chart sliders display specific data for a selected data point. When chart sliders are enabled, a table displays the specific data values
for the selected data point.

1. In the top pane of the Dell Storage Manager Client, click Edit User Settings. The Edit User Settings dialog box appears.
2. Click on the General tab.
3. Under Charting Options, select the Show sliders on charts check box.
4. Click OK.

Viewing Storage Logs

Select the Date Range of Log Events to Display

You can view log events for the last day, last 3 days, last 5 days, last week, or specify a custom time period.

1. Click the Storage Logs tab.

2. Select the date range of the event log data to display by clicking one of the following options:
• Last Day – Displays the past 24 hours of event log data.
• Last 3 Days – Displays the past 72 hours of event log data.
• Last 5 Days – Displays the past 120 hours of event log data.
• Last Week – Displays the past 168 hours of event log data.
• Last Month – Displays the past month of event log data.
• Custom – Displays options that allow you to specify the start time and the end time of the event log data to display.
3. If you clicked Custom, perform the following tasks to specify the start time and end time of the event log data to display.
To specify the start time:

a. Select Other from the Start Time drop-down menu.

b. Select the start date of the time period to display from the date drop-down menu calendar.
c. Specify the start time of the time period in the time field.
To set the start time to the beginning of the day, select the Start of Day check box.
d. Click Update to display the event log data using the specified start time.
To specify the end time:

a. Clear the Use Current check box.

b. Select the stop date of the time period to display from the date drop-down menu calendar.
c. Specify the stop time of the time period in the time field.
To set the stop time to the end of the day, select the End of Day check box.
d. Click Update to display the event log data using the specified end time.

164 Viewing Storage Center Information

Search for Events in the Storage Logs
Use the Search field to search the list of log events.

1. Click the Storage Logs tab.

2. Enter the text to search for in the Search field.
3. To make the search case sensitive, select the Match Case check box.
4. To prevent the search from wrapping, clear the Wrap check box.
5. To only match whole words or phrases within the logs, select the Full Match check box.
6. To highlight all of the matches of the search, select the Highlight check box.
7. Click Find Next or Find Previous to search for the text.
If a match is found, the first log entry with matching text is selected from the list of storage logs.

If a match is not found, an Error dialog box appears and it displays the text that could not be found.

NOTE: By default, when a search reaches the bottom of the list and Find Next is clicked, the search wraps around
to the first match in the list. When a search reaches the top of the list and Find Previous is clicked, the search
wraps around to the last match in the list.

Viewing Storage System Alerts

Use the Alerts tab in the Storage view to display and search storage system alerts.
Alerts represent current issues present on the storage system, which clear themselves automatically if the situation that caused
them is corrected.

Figure 23. Alerts Tab

Search for Storage Alerts

Use the Search field to find text in the list of storage alerts.

1. Click the Storage Alerts tab.

2. Enter the text to search for in the Search field.
3. To make the search case sensitive, select the Match Case check box.
4. To prevent the search from wrapping, clear the Wrap check box.
5. To match whole phrases within the alerts, select the Full Match check box.
6. To highlight all of the matches of the search, select the Highlight check box.

Viewing Storage Center Information 165

7. Click Find Next or Find Previous to search for the text.
If a match is found, the first alert with matching text is selected from the list of storage alerts.

If a match is not found, an Error dialog box appears and it displays the text that could not be found.

NOTE: By default, when a search reaches the bottom of the list and Find Next is clicked, the search wraps around
to the first match in the list. When a search reaches the top of the list and Find Previous is clicked, the search
wraps around to the last match in the list.

Acknowledge Storage Center Alerts

Alerts can be acknowledged to indicate to the Storage Center that you have read the alert message and are aware of the problem.

1. Click the Storage Alerts tab.

2. Select the Storage Center alerts to acknowledge, then click Acknowledge. The Acknowledge Alert dialog box opens.
NOTE: The option to acknowledge an alert will not appear if an alert has already been acknowledged.
3. Click OK to acknowledge the Storage Center alerts displayed in the Acknowledge Alert dialog box.

Exporting Usage Data

You can export Storage Usage and IO Usage data to CSV, Text, Excel, HTML, XML, or PDF.

Export Storage Usage Data

You can export storage usage data for Storage Centers, volumes, and servers.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. Click Save Storage Usage Data on the Storage navigation pane.
The Save Storage Usage Data dialog box appears.

Figure 24. Save Storage Usage Dialog Box

3. Specify the storage usage data to export by selecting or clearing the check boxes in the Storage Center Storage Usage,
Volume Storage Usage, and Server Storage Usage areas of the dialog box.
By default, all of the storage usage data is selected to be exported.
4. Specify how to display the size data in the output by selecting one of the following radio buttons:

166 Viewing Storage Center Information

 • Save size data as text (easy for reading): Displays size data using the units that are the most appropriate for the
displayed values. For example, 2097152 megabytes is displayed as 2 TB.
• Save size data as MB (easy for sorting): Displays size data in megabytes, without a unit of measure label. For example, 2
TB is displayed as 2097152 (megabytes).
5. Select a file type for the output: CSV (.csv), Text (.txt), Excel (.xls), HTML (.htm), XML (.xml), or PDF (.pdf).
6. Click Browse to specify the file name and location to save the file.
7. Click OK.

Export IO Usage Data

You can export IO usage data for the most active volumes, servers. and disks. You can also export IO usage data for Storage
Centers, volumes, servers, disks, controllers, and storage profiles.

1. Click the Charting tab.

2. Click Save IO Usage Data on the Charting navigation pane.
The Save IO Usage Data dialog box appears.

Figure 25. Save IO Usage Data Dialog Box

3. Specify the type of IO usage data to export by selecting one of the following radio buttons:
• Save ’Most Active Report’ IO Usage Information
• Save Chart IO Usage Information
4. If you selected the Save ’Most Active Report’ IO Usage Information radio button, select the check boxes of the IO usage
data to export:
• Volume Most Active: Exports IO usage data for the volumes.
• Server Most Active: Exports IO usage data for the servers.
• Disk Most Active: Exports IO usage data for the disks.
• Remote Storage Center IO Usage: Exports IO usage data for remote Storage Centers.
5. If you selected the Save Chart IO Usage Information radio button:
a. Select the storage object from which to export IO usage data from the Select Object Type drop-down menu.
b. If you selected an object other than a Storage Center, select the check boxes of the storage objects from which you want
to export IO usage data.
• To select all of the storage objects, click Select All.
• To deselect all of the storage objects, click Unselect All.

Viewing Storage Center Information 167

6. Select a file type for the output: CSV (.csv), Text (.txt), Excel (.xls), HTML (.htm), XML (.xml), or PDF (.pdf).
7. Click Browse to specify the file name and location to save the file.
8. Click OK.

Monitoring Storage Center Hardware

Use the Hardware tab of the Storage view to monitor Storage Center hardware.

Figure 26. Hardware Tab

Related links
Monitoring a Storage Center Controller
Monitoring a Storage Center Disk Enclosure
Monitoring SSD Endurance
Viewing UPS Status
Managing Disk Enclosures
Shutting Down and Restarting a Storage Center

Monitoring a Storage Center Controller

The Hardware tab displays status information for the controller(s) in a Storage Center.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

View Summary Information for All Controllers in a Storage Center

The Controllers node on the Hardware tab displays summary information for all controllers in a Storage Center.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select Controllers.
3. Use the tabs in the right pane to view summary information for the controllers and controller components.

View Summary Information for a Controller

The controller node on the Hardware tab displays summary information for the controller, including name, version, status, and
network settings.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select the controller. The right pane displays controller summary information.

168 Viewing Storage Center Information

View a Diagram of a Controller
The Hardware tab displays a diagram of the back of a controller selected from the Hardware tab navigation pane.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand the Controllers node then select a controller. The right pane displays a diagram
of the controller
The hardware view indicates failed components with a red overlay.
3. To view more information about hardware components, mouse over a hardware component. A tool tip appears and displays
information including the name and status of the hardware component.
4. To adjust the zoom on the controller diagram, change the position of the zoom slider located to the right of the controller
diagram.
• To zoom in, click and drag the zoom slider up.
• To zoom out, click and drag the zoom slider down.
5. To move the controller diagram in the Controller View tab, click and drag the controller diagram.

View IO Port Information and Status for a Controller

The controller node on the Hardware tab displays summary and status information for all Fibre Channel, iSCSI, and SAS ports on IO
cards installed in the controller.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand the Controllers node, expand the node for a specific controller, then select IO
Ports. The right pane displays summary and status information for all IO port types present in the controller.
3. To view more detailed information for a particular protocol, select Fibre Channel, iSCSI, or SAS in the Hardware tab
navigation pane.

Locate a Port in the Controller Diagram

The Hardware tab displays the location of a port in the controller diagram when that port is selected from the Hardware tab
navigation pane.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand the Controllers node, expand the node for a specific controller, then select IO
Ports.
3. Select an IO port from the Fibre Channel, iSCSI, or SAS nodes. The Port View tab in the right pane highlights the selected
port in the controller diagram.

View Fan Status for a Controller

The Fan Sensors node on the Hardware tab displays summary and status information for fans in the controller.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand the Controllers node, expand the node for a specific controller, then click Fan
Sensor. The right pane displays summary and status information for the fans in the controller.

View Power Supply Status for a Controller

The Power Supply node on the Hardware tab displays summary and status information for power supplies in the controller.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand the Controllers node, expand the node for a specific controller, then click Power
Supply. The right pane displays summary and status information for the power supplies in the controller.

Viewing Storage Center Information 169

View Temperature Information for a Controller
The Temperature Sensor node on the Hardware tab displays summary and status information for temperature sensors in the
controller.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand the Controllers node, expand the node for a specific controller, then click
Temperature Sensor. The right pane displays summary and status information for temperature sensors in the controller.

View Voltage Sensor Status for a Controller

The Voltage Sensor node on the Hardware tab displays status information for voltage sensors in the controller.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand the Controllers node, expand the node for a specific controller, then click
Voltage Sensor. The right pane displays status information for voltage sensors in the controller.

View Cache Card Status for a Controller

The Cache Card node on the Hardware tab displays status information for the cache card in the controller.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand the Controllers node, expand the node for a specific controller, then click Cache
Card. The right pane displays summary and status information for cache card in the controller.

Monitoring a Storage Center Disk Enclosure

The Hardware tab displays status information for the disk enclosure(s) in a Storage Center.
NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

View Summary Information for All Enclosures in a Storage Center

The Enclosures node on the Hardware tab displays summary information for all disk enclosures in a Storage Center.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select Enclosures.
3. Use the tabs in the right pane to view summary information for the enclosures and enclosure components.

View Summary Information for an Enclosure

The enclosure node on the Hardware tab displays summary information for the enclosure.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select an enclosure. The right pane displays summary information.

View a Diagram of an Enclosure

The Hardware tab displays a graphical representation of an enclosure selected from the Hardware tab navigation pane.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand the Enclosures node.
3. Select an enclosure. The Enclosure View tab in the right pane displays a front and back diagram of the selected enclosure.
The hardware view indicates failed components with a red overlay.
4. To view more information about hardware components, mouse over a hardware component. A tool tip appears and displays
information including the name and status of the hardware component.
5. To adjust the zoom on the enclosure diagram, change the position of the zoom slider located to the right of the enclosure
diagram.
• To zoom in, click and drag the zoom slider up.

170 Viewing Storage Center Information

 • To zoom out, click and drag the zoom slider down.
6. To move the enclosure diagram in the Enclosure View tab, click and drag the enclosure diagram.

View Alarm Status for an Enclosure

The Audible Alarms node on the Hardware tab displays alarm status for the enclosure.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select Audible Alarms. The right pane displays summary information.

View Disk Status for an Enclosure

The Disks node in the Hardware tab displays the statuses of all disks in the enclosure.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand the Enclosure node then the node for a specific enclosure.
3. Click the Disks node. The right pane displays the status of all disks in the enclosure.

Locate a Disk in the Enclosure Diagram

The Hardware tab shows the location of a disk selected from the Disks tab in the right pane.

1. Click Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand the Enclosures node, then the node for a specific enclosure.
3. Click the Disks node. The right pane displays the disks in the enclosure in the Disks tab.
4. Select a disk from the Disks tab. The Disk View tab highlights the disk in the enclosure diagram.
NOTE: Storage Manager groups disks in an SC280 enclosure into drawers. If the enclosure is an SC280, you must
expand a drawer to select a disk.

View Cooling Fan Status for an Enclosure

The Cooling Fan Sensors node on the Hardware tab displays cooling fan status for the enclosure.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand the Enclosures node, then the node for a specific enclosure.
3. Select Cooling Fan Sensors. The right pane displays summary information.

Locate a Cooling Fan Sensor in the Enclosure Diagram

The Hardware tab highlights the location of a cooling fan sensor in the enclosure diagram.

1. Click the Storage view, then click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand the Enclosures node, then the node for a specific enclosure.
3. Click the Cooling Fan Sensors node. The right pane lists the cooling fan sensors in that enclosure.
4. Select a cooling fan sensor from the Cooling Fans tab. The Fan View tab highlights the selected fan in the enclosure diagram.

View IO Module Status for an Enclosure

The I/O Modules node on the Hardware tab displays IO module status for the enclosure.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand the Enclosures node, then the node for a specific enclosure.
3. Click I/O Modules. The right pane displays status information for the IO module selected from the I/O Modules tab.

Locate an IO Module in the Enclosure Diagram

The Hardware tab highlights the location of an IO module in the enclosure diagram.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand the Enclosures node then, the node for a specific enclosure.

Viewing Storage Center Information 171

3. Select the I/O Modules node. The right pane lists the IO modules in the enclosure.
4. Select an IO module from the I/O Modules tab. The IO Module View tab highlights the selected IO module in the enclosure
diagram.

View Power Supply Status for an Enclosure

The Power Supplies node on the Hardware tab displays power supply status for the enclosure.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand the Enclosures node, then the node for a specific enclosure.
3. Click Power Supplies. The right pane displays status information for the power supply selected from the Power Supplies tab.

Locate a Power Supply in the Enclosure Diagram

The Hardware tab highlights the location of a power supply in the enclosure diagram.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand the Enclosures node, then the node for a specific enclosure.
3. Select the Power Supplies node. The right pane lists the power supplies in the enclosure.
4. Select a power supply from the Power Supplies tab. The Power Supply View tab highlights the selected power supply in the
enclosure diagram.

View Temperatures for an Enclosure

The Temperature Sensor node on the Hardware tab displays temperatures for the enclosure.

1. Click the Hardware tab.

2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, expand the Enclosures node, then the node for a specific enclosure.
3. Click Temperature Sensor. The right pane displays temperature sensor information.

Monitoring SSD Endurance

The lifespan of a Solid State Drive (SSD) is determined by how much data is written to it. The endurance level for an SSD is
displayed as a percentage that indicates the amount of wear life remaining. Some SSDs track and report endurance status and some
do not.
A fresh drive starts with an endurance level of 100%, and the endurance level decreases as data is written to the drive. A Storage
Center triggers an alert when it determines that an SSD will reach its endurance limit within 120 days.

NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

View Current Endurance and Endurance History for an SSD

The current endurance level for an SSD is displayed as a percentage. The endurance level for an SSD is also recorded over time and
can be displayed in a graph.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the SSD.
3. View endurance information for the SSD.
• To view the current endurance level for the SSD, see the Endurance value displayed in the right pane.
• To view endurance history information for the SSD, click the Endurance History subtab.

View the Current Endurance Level for All SSDs in a Disk Folder
If a disk folder contains SSDs, the summary table displays the percentage of wear life remaining for each SSD and a corresponding
endurance chart.

1. Click the Storage tab.

2. In the Storage tab navigation pane, select the disk folder.
3. On the Disks subtab, locate the Endurance and Endurance Chart columns in the table.

172 Viewing Storage Center Information

 Figure 27. SSD Endurance

The Endurance Chart column shows a wear gauge that indicates the amount of wear life remaining and when an alert will be
sent. The gauge indicators are:

• Red: Fail zone calculated from disk data that estimates when 120 days remain in the life of the disk. An alert is sent when
the wear life moves from the green zone to the red zone.
• Green: Safe operating zone.
• Black Tick Mark: Current Endurance level, in which the far right position indicates 100% endurance (new disk, no wear)
and the far left position indicates 0% (end of life). This is also shown as the Endurance percentage in the Endurance
column.

Viewing UPS Status

A UPS provides power redundancy to a Storage Center with the use of a backup battery.
If the power to a Storage Center is cut off, the UPS immediately switches over to the battery giving a Storage Center administrator
time to properly power down the Storage Center or fix the power issue. When the UPS switches to the battery, it sends an on
battery message to the Storage Center. The Storage Center registers the battery message as an alert, turns off write cache, and
flushes the cache to disk. The Storage Center continues to operate in this way until it shuts down or the UPS sends an online
message allowing it to return to normal operations.

NOTE: For user interface reference information, click Help.

View Summary Information for All UPS Units that Serve the Storage Center
The UPS node on the Hardware tab displays summary information for the UPS units that provide backup power for the Storage
Center.
Prerequisites
A UPS unit must have been configured for the Storage Center.

Steps
1. Click the Hardware tab.
2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, select UPS. The right pane displays summary information.

Viewing Storage Center Information 173

View Summary Information for a UPS Unit that Serves the Storage Center
The Hardware tab displays summary information for the UPS units that provide backup power for the Storage Center.
Prerequisites
A UPS must have been configured for the Storage Center.

Steps
1. Click the Hardware tab.
2. In the Hardware tab navigation pane, under the UPS node, select the name of a UPS unit. The right pane displays summary
information.

174 Viewing Storage Center Information